diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
118 files changed, 2952 insertions, 1094 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 7286ad090db7..2a39aeba1464 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX | |||
@@ -42,14 +42,8 @@ IRQ.txt | |||
42 | - description of what an IRQ is. | 42 | - description of what an IRQ is. |
43 | ManagementStyle | 43 | ManagementStyle |
44 | - how to (attempt to) manage kernel hackers. | 44 | - how to (attempt to) manage kernel hackers. |
45 | MSI-HOWTO.txt | ||
46 | - the Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) Driver Guide HOWTO and FAQ. | ||
47 | RCU/ | 45 | RCU/ |
48 | - directory with info on RCU (read-copy update). | 46 | - directory with info on RCU (read-copy update). |
49 | README.DAC960 | ||
50 | - info on Mylex DAC960/DAC1100 PCI RAID Controller Driver for Linux. | ||
51 | README.cycladesZ | ||
52 | - info on Cyclades-Z firmware loading. | ||
53 | SAK.txt | 47 | SAK.txt |
54 | - info on Secure Attention Keys. | 48 | - info on Secure Attention Keys. |
55 | SM501.txt | 49 | SM501.txt |
@@ -86,20 +80,16 @@ blackfin/ | |||
86 | - directory with documentation for the Blackfin arch. | 80 | - directory with documentation for the Blackfin arch. |
87 | block/ | 81 | block/ |
88 | - info on the Block I/O (BIO) layer. | 82 | - info on the Block I/O (BIO) layer. |
83 | blockdev/ | ||
84 | - info on block devices & drivers | ||
89 | cachetlb.txt | 85 | cachetlb.txt |
90 | - describes the cache/TLB flushing interfaces Linux uses. | 86 | - describes the cache/TLB flushing interfaces Linux uses. |
91 | cciss.txt | ||
92 | - info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers. | ||
93 | cdrom/ | 87 | cdrom/ |
94 | - directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has. | 88 | - directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has. |
95 | computone.txt | ||
96 | - info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver. | ||
97 | connector/ | 89 | connector/ |
98 | - docs on the netlink based userspace<->kernel space communication mod. | 90 | - docs on the netlink based userspace<->kernel space communication mod. |
99 | console/ | 91 | console/ |
100 | - documentation on Linux console drivers. | 92 | - documentation on Linux console drivers. |
101 | cpqarray.txt | ||
102 | - info on using Compaq's SMART2 Intelligent Disk Array Controllers. | ||
103 | cpu-freq/ | 93 | cpu-freq/ |
104 | - info on CPU frequency and voltage scaling. | 94 | - info on CPU frequency and voltage scaling. |
105 | cpu-hotplug.txt | 95 | cpu-hotplug.txt |
@@ -126,8 +116,6 @@ device-mapper/ | |||
126 | - directory with info on Device Mapper. | 116 | - directory with info on Device Mapper. |
127 | devices.txt | 117 | devices.txt |
128 | - plain ASCII listing of all the nodes in /dev/ with major minor #'s. | 118 | - plain ASCII listing of all the nodes in /dev/ with major minor #'s. |
129 | digiepca.txt | ||
130 | - info on Digi Intl. {PC,PCI,EISA}Xx and Xem series cards. | ||
131 | dontdiff | 119 | dontdiff |
132 | - file containing a list of files that should never be diff'ed. | 120 | - file containing a list of files that should never be diff'ed. |
133 | driver-model/ | 121 | driver-model/ |
@@ -152,14 +140,10 @@ filesystems/ | |||
152 | - info on the vfs and the various filesystems that Linux supports. | 140 | - info on the vfs and the various filesystems that Linux supports. |
153 | firmware_class/ | 141 | firmware_class/ |
154 | - request_firmware() hotplug interface info. | 142 | - request_firmware() hotplug interface info. |
155 | floppy.txt | ||
156 | - notes and driver options for the floppy disk driver. | ||
157 | frv/ | 143 | frv/ |
158 | - Fujitsu FR-V Linux documentation. | 144 | - Fujitsu FR-V Linux documentation. |
159 | gpio.txt | 145 | gpio.txt |
160 | - overview of GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) access conventions. | 146 | - overview of GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) access conventions. |
161 | hayes-esp.txt | ||
162 | - info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver. | ||
163 | highuid.txt | 147 | highuid.txt |
164 | - notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs. | 148 | - notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs. |
165 | timers/ | 149 | timers/ |
@@ -172,7 +156,7 @@ i2c/ | |||
172 | - directory with info about the I2C bus/protocol (2 wire, kHz speed). | 156 | - directory with info about the I2C bus/protocol (2 wire, kHz speed). |
173 | i2o/ | 157 | i2o/ |
174 | - directory with info about the Linux I2O subsystem. | 158 | - directory with info about the Linux I2O subsystem. |
175 | i386/ | 159 | x86/i386/ |
176 | - directory with info about Linux on Intel 32 bit architecture. | 160 | - directory with info about Linux on Intel 32 bit architecture. |
177 | ia64/ | 161 | ia64/ |
178 | - directory with info about Linux on Intel 64 bit architecture. | 162 | - directory with info about Linux on Intel 64 bit architecture. |
@@ -186,8 +170,6 @@ io_ordering.txt | |||
186 | - info on ordering I/O writes to memory-mapped addresses. | 170 | - info on ordering I/O writes to memory-mapped addresses. |
187 | ioctl/ | 171 | ioctl/ |
188 | - directory with documents describing various IOCTL calls. | 172 | - directory with documents describing various IOCTL calls. |
189 | ioctl-number.txt | ||
190 | - how to implement and register device/driver ioctl calls. | ||
191 | iostats.txt | 173 | iostats.txt |
192 | - info on I/O statistics Linux kernel provides. | 174 | - info on I/O statistics Linux kernel provides. |
193 | irqflags-tracing.txt | 175 | irqflags-tracing.txt |
@@ -250,14 +232,10 @@ mips/ | |||
250 | - directory with info about Linux on MIPS architecture. | 232 | - directory with info about Linux on MIPS architecture. |
251 | mono.txt | 233 | mono.txt |
252 | - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC. | 234 | - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC. |
253 | moxa-smartio | ||
254 | - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver. | ||
255 | mutex-design.txt | 235 | mutex-design.txt |
256 | - info on the generic mutex subsystem. | 236 | - info on the generic mutex subsystem. |
257 | namespaces/ | 237 | namespaces/ |
258 | - directory with various information about namespaces | 238 | - directory with various information about namespaces |
259 | nbd.txt | ||
260 | - info on a TCP implementation of a network block device. | ||
261 | netlabel/ | 239 | netlabel/ |
262 | - directory with information on the NetLabel subsystem. | 240 | - directory with information on the NetLabel subsystem. |
263 | networking/ | 241 | networking/ |
@@ -270,8 +248,6 @@ numastat.txt | |||
270 | - info on how to read Numa policy hit/miss statistics in sysfs. | 248 | - info on how to read Numa policy hit/miss statistics in sysfs. |
271 | oops-tracing.txt | 249 | oops-tracing.txt |
272 | - how to decode those nasty internal kernel error dump messages. | 250 | - how to decode those nasty internal kernel error dump messages. |
273 | paride.txt | ||
274 | - information about the parallel port IDE subsystem. | ||
275 | parisc/ | 251 | parisc/ |
276 | - directory with info on using Linux on PA-RISC architecture. | 252 | - directory with info on using Linux on PA-RISC architecture. |
277 | parport.txt | 253 | parport.txt |
@@ -290,20 +266,16 @@ powerpc/ | |||
290 | - directory with info on using Linux with the PowerPC. | 266 | - directory with info on using Linux with the PowerPC. |
291 | preempt-locking.txt | 267 | preempt-locking.txt |
292 | - info on locking under a preemptive kernel. | 268 | - info on locking under a preemptive kernel. |
269 | printk-formats.txt | ||
270 | - how to get printk format specifiers right | ||
293 | prio_tree.txt | 271 | prio_tree.txt |
294 | - info on radix-priority-search-tree use for indexing vmas. | 272 | - info on radix-priority-search-tree use for indexing vmas. |
295 | ramdisk.txt | ||
296 | - short guide on how to set up and use the RAM disk. | ||
297 | rbtree.txt | 273 | rbtree.txt |
298 | - info on what red-black trees are and what they are for. | 274 | - info on what red-black trees are and what they are for. |
299 | riscom8.txt | ||
300 | - notes on using the RISCom/8 multi-port serial driver. | ||
301 | robust-futex-ABI.txt | 275 | robust-futex-ABI.txt |
302 | - documentation of the robust futex ABI. | 276 | - documentation of the robust futex ABI. |
303 | robust-futexes.txt | 277 | robust-futexes.txt |
304 | - a description of what robust futexes are. | 278 | - a description of what robust futexes are. |
305 | rocket.txt | ||
306 | - info on the Comtrol RocketPort multiport serial driver. | ||
307 | rt-mutex-design.txt | 279 | rt-mutex-design.txt |
308 | - description of the RealTime mutex implementation design. | 280 | - description of the RealTime mutex implementation design. |
309 | rt-mutex.txt | 281 | rt-mutex.txt |
@@ -332,8 +304,6 @@ sparc/ | |||
332 | - directory with info on using Linux on Sparc architecture. | 304 | - directory with info on using Linux on Sparc architecture. |
333 | sparse.txt | 305 | sparse.txt |
334 | - info on how to obtain and use the sparse tool for typechecking. | 306 | - info on how to obtain and use the sparse tool for typechecking. |
335 | specialix.txt | ||
336 | - info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card. | ||
337 | spi/ | 307 | spi/ |
338 | - overview of Linux kernel Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support. | 308 | - overview of Linux kernel Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support. |
339 | spinlocks.txt | 309 | spinlocks.txt |
@@ -342,14 +312,10 @@ stable_api_nonsense.txt | |||
342 | - info on why the kernel does not have a stable in-kernel api or abi. | 312 | - info on why the kernel does not have a stable in-kernel api or abi. |
343 | stable_kernel_rules.txt | 313 | stable_kernel_rules.txt |
344 | - rules and procedures for the -stable kernel releases. | 314 | - rules and procedures for the -stable kernel releases. |
345 | stallion.txt | ||
346 | - info on using the Stallion multiport serial driver. | ||
347 | svga.txt | 315 | svga.txt |
348 | - short guide on selecting video modes at boot via VGA BIOS. | 316 | - short guide on selecting video modes at boot via VGA BIOS. |
349 | sysfs-rules.txt | 317 | sysfs-rules.txt |
350 | - How not to use sysfs. | 318 | - How not to use sysfs. |
351 | sx.txt | ||
352 | - info on the Specialix SX/SI multiport serial driver. | ||
353 | sysctl/ | 319 | sysctl/ |
354 | - directory with info on the /proc/sys/* files. | 320 | - directory with info on the /proc/sys/* files. |
355 | sysrq.txt | 321 | sysrq.txt |
@@ -358,8 +324,6 @@ telephony/ | |||
358 | - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. | 324 | - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. |
359 | time_interpolators.txt | 325 | time_interpolators.txt |
360 | - info on time interpolators. | 326 | - info on time interpolators. |
361 | tty.txt | ||
362 | - guide to the locking policies of the tty layer. | ||
363 | uml/ | 327 | uml/ |
364 | - directory with information about User Mode Linux. | 328 | - directory with information about User Mode Linux. |
365 | unicode.txt | 329 | unicode.txt |
@@ -382,7 +346,7 @@ w1/ | |||
382 | - directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem. | 346 | - directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem. |
383 | watchdog/ | 347 | watchdog/ |
384 | - how to auto-reboot Linux if it has "fallen and can't get up". ;-) | 348 | - how to auto-reboot Linux if it has "fallen and can't get up". ;-) |
385 | x86_64/ | 349 | x86/x86_64/ |
386 | - directory with info on Linux support for AMD x86-64 (Hammer) machines. | 350 | - directory with info on Linux support for AMD x86-64 (Hammer) machines. |
387 | zorro.txt | 351 | zorro.txt |
388 | - info on writing drivers for Zorro bus devices found on Amigas. | 352 | - info on writing drivers for Zorro bus devices found on Amigas. |
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-umc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-umc new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..948fec412446 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-umc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ | |||
1 | What: /sys/bus/umc/ | ||
2 | Date: July 2008 | ||
3 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
4 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
5 | Description: | ||
6 | The Wireless Host Controller Interface (WHCI) | ||
7 | specification describes a PCI-based device with | ||
8 | multiple capabilities; the UWB Multi-interface | ||
9 | Controller (UMC). | ||
10 | |||
11 | The umc bus presents each of the individual | ||
12 | capabilties as a device. | ||
13 | |||
14 | What: /sys/bus/umc/devices/.../capability_id | ||
15 | Date: July 2008 | ||
16 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
17 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
18 | Description: | ||
19 | The ID of this capability, with 0 being the radio | ||
20 | controller capability. | ||
21 | |||
22 | What: /sys/bus/umc/devices/.../version | ||
23 | Date: July 2008 | ||
24 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
25 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
26 | Description: | ||
27 | The specification version this capability's hardware | ||
28 | interface complies with. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index df6c8a0159f1..7772928ee48f 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb | |||
@@ -101,3 +101,46 @@ Description: | |||
101 | Users: | 101 | Users: |
102 | USB PM tool | 102 | USB PM tool |
103 | git://git.moblin.org/users/sarah/usb-pm-tool/ | 103 | git://git.moblin.org/users/sarah/usb-pm-tool/ |
104 | |||
105 | What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../authorized | ||
106 | Date: July 2008 | ||
107 | KernelVersion: 2.6.26 | ||
108 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
109 | Description: | ||
110 | Authorized devices are available for use by device | ||
111 | drivers, non-authorized one are not. By default, wired | ||
112 | USB devices are authorized. | ||
113 | |||
114 | Certified Wireless USB devices are not authorized | ||
115 | initially and should be (by writing 1) after the | ||
116 | device has been authenticated. | ||
117 | |||
118 | What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../wusb_cdid | ||
119 | Date: July 2008 | ||
120 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
121 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
122 | Description: | ||
123 | For Certified Wireless USB devices only. | ||
124 | |||
125 | A devices's CDID, as 16 space-separated hex octets. | ||
126 | |||
127 | What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../wusb_ck | ||
128 | Date: July 2008 | ||
129 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
130 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
131 | Description: | ||
132 | For Certified Wireless USB devices only. | ||
133 | |||
134 | Write the device's connection key (CK) to start the | ||
135 | authentication of the device. The CK is 16 | ||
136 | space-separated hex octets. | ||
137 | |||
138 | What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../wusb_disconnect | ||
139 | Date: July 2008 | ||
140 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
141 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
142 | Description: | ||
143 | For Certified Wireless USB devices only. | ||
144 | |||
145 | Write a 1 to force the device to disconnect | ||
146 | (equivalent to unplugging a wired USB device). | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-c2port b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-c2port new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..716cffc457e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-c2port | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ | |||
1 | What: /sys/class/c2port/ | ||
2 | Date: October 2008 | ||
3 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
4 | Description: | ||
5 | The /sys/class/c2port/ directory will contain files and | ||
6 | directories that will provide a unified interface to | ||
7 | the C2 port interface. | ||
8 | |||
9 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX | ||
10 | Date: October 2008 | ||
11 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
12 | Description: | ||
13 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/ directory is related to X-th | ||
14 | C2 port into the system. Each directory will contain files to | ||
15 | manage and control its C2 port. | ||
16 | |||
17 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/access | ||
18 | Date: October 2008 | ||
19 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
20 | Description: | ||
21 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/access file enable the access | ||
22 | to the C2 port from the system. No commands can be sent | ||
23 | till this entry is set to 0. | ||
24 | |||
25 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/dev_id | ||
26 | Date: October 2008 | ||
27 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
28 | Description: | ||
29 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/dev_id file show the device ID | ||
30 | of the connected micro. | ||
31 | |||
32 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_access | ||
33 | Date: October 2008 | ||
34 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
35 | Description: | ||
36 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_access file enable the | ||
37 | access to the on-board flash of the connected micro. | ||
38 | No commands can be sent till this entry is set to 0. | ||
39 | |||
40 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_block_size | ||
41 | Date: October 2008 | ||
42 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
43 | Description: | ||
44 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_block_size file show | ||
45 | the on-board flash block size of the connected micro. | ||
46 | |||
47 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_blocks_num | ||
48 | Date: October 2008 | ||
49 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
50 | Description: | ||
51 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_blocks_num file show | ||
52 | the on-board flash blocks number of the connected micro. | ||
53 | |||
54 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_data | ||
55 | Date: October 2008 | ||
56 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
57 | Description: | ||
58 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_data file export | ||
59 | the content of the on-board flash of the connected micro. | ||
60 | |||
61 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase | ||
62 | Date: October 2008 | ||
63 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
64 | Description: | ||
65 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase file execute | ||
66 | the "erase" command on the on-board flash of the connected | ||
67 | micro. | ||
68 | |||
69 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase | ||
70 | Date: October 2008 | ||
71 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
72 | Description: | ||
73 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase file show the | ||
74 | on-board flash size of the connected micro. | ||
75 | |||
76 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/reset | ||
77 | Date: October 2008 | ||
78 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
79 | Description: | ||
80 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/reset file execute a "reset" | ||
81 | command on the connected micro. | ||
82 | |||
83 | What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/rev_id | ||
84 | Date: October 2008 | ||
85 | Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it> | ||
86 | Description: | ||
87 | The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/rev_id file show the revision ID | ||
88 | of the connected micro. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-usb_host b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-usb_host new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..46b66ad1f1b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-usb_host | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ | |||
1 | What: /sys/class/usb_host/usb_hostN/wusb_chid | ||
2 | Date: July 2008 | ||
3 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
4 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
5 | Description: | ||
6 | Write the CHID (16 space-separated hex octets) for this host controller. | ||
7 | This starts the host controller, allowing it to accept connection from | ||
8 | WUSB devices. | ||
9 | |||
10 | Set an all zero CHID to stop the host controller. | ||
11 | |||
12 | What: /sys/class/usb_host/usb_hostN/wusb_trust_timeout | ||
13 | Date: July 2008 | ||
14 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
15 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
16 | Description: | ||
17 | Devices that haven't sent a WUSB packet to the host | ||
18 | within 'wusb_trust_timeout' ms are considered to have | ||
19 | disconnected and are removed. The default value of | ||
20 | 4000 ms is the value required by the WUSB | ||
21 | specification. | ||
22 | |||
23 | Since this relates to security (specifically, the | ||
24 | lifetime of PTKs and GTKs) it should not be changed | ||
25 | from the default. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a0d18dbeb7a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ | |||
1 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc | ||
2 | Date: July 2008 | ||
3 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
4 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
5 | Description: | ||
6 | Interfaces for WiMedia Ultra Wideband Common Radio | ||
7 | Platform (UWB) radio controllers. | ||
8 | |||
9 | Familiarity with the ECMA-368 'High Rate Ultra | ||
10 | Wideband MAC and PHY Specification' is assumed. | ||
11 | |||
12 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/beacon_timeout_ms | ||
13 | Date: July 2008 | ||
14 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
15 | Description: | ||
16 | If no beacons are received from a device for at least | ||
17 | this time, the device will be considered to have gone | ||
18 | and it will be removed. The default is 3 superframes | ||
19 | (~197 ms) as required by the specification. | ||
20 | |||
21 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/ | ||
22 | Date: July 2008 | ||
23 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
24 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
25 | Description: | ||
26 | An individual UWB radio controller. | ||
27 | |||
28 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/beacon | ||
29 | Date: July 2008 | ||
30 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
31 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
32 | Description: | ||
33 | Write: | ||
34 | |||
35 | <channel> [<bpst offset>] | ||
36 | |||
37 | to start beaconing on a specific channel, or stop | ||
38 | beaconing if <channel> is -1. Valid channels depends | ||
39 | on the radio controller's supported band groups. | ||
40 | |||
41 | <bpst offset> may be used to try and join a specific | ||
42 | beacon group if more than one was found during a scan. | ||
43 | |||
44 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/scan | ||
45 | Date: July 2008 | ||
46 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
47 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
48 | Description: | ||
49 | Write: | ||
50 | |||
51 | <channel> <type> [<bpst offset>] | ||
52 | |||
53 | to start (or stop) scanning on a channel. <type> is one of: | ||
54 | 0 - scan | ||
55 | 1 - scan outside BP | ||
56 | 2 - scan while inactive | ||
57 | 3 - scanning disabled | ||
58 | 4 - scan (with start time of <bpst offset>) | ||
59 | |||
60 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/mac_address | ||
61 | Date: July 2008 | ||
62 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
63 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
64 | Description: | ||
65 | The EUI-48, in colon-separated hex octets, for this | ||
66 | radio controller. A write will change the radio | ||
67 | controller's EUI-48 but only do so while the device is | ||
68 | not beaconing or scanning. | ||
69 | |||
70 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/wusbhc | ||
71 | Date: July 2008 | ||
72 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
73 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
74 | Description: | ||
75 | A symlink to the device (if any) of the WUSB Host | ||
76 | Controller PAL using this radio controller. | ||
77 | |||
78 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/ | ||
79 | Date: July 2008 | ||
80 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
81 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
82 | Description: | ||
83 | A neighbour UWB device that has either been detected | ||
84 | as part of a scan or is a member of the radio | ||
85 | controllers beacon group. | ||
86 | |||
87 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/BPST | ||
88 | Date: July 2008 | ||
89 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
90 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
91 | Description: | ||
92 | The time (using the radio controllers internal 1 ms | ||
93 | interval superframe timer) of the last beacon from | ||
94 | this device was received. | ||
95 | |||
96 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/DevAddr | ||
97 | Date: July 2008 | ||
98 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
99 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
100 | Description: | ||
101 | The current DevAddr of this device in colon separated | ||
102 | hex octets. | ||
103 | |||
104 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/EUI_48 | ||
105 | Date: July 2008 | ||
106 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
107 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
108 | Description: | ||
109 | |||
110 | The EUI-48 of this device in colon separated hex | ||
111 | octets. | ||
112 | |||
113 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/BPST | ||
114 | Date: July 2008 | ||
115 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
116 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
117 | Description: | ||
118 | |||
119 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/IEs | ||
120 | Date: July 2008 | ||
121 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
122 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
123 | Description: | ||
124 | The latest IEs included in this device's beacon, in | ||
125 | space separated hex octets with one IE per line. | ||
126 | |||
127 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/LQE | ||
128 | Date: July 2008 | ||
129 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
130 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
131 | Description: | ||
132 | Link Quality Estimate - the Signal to Noise Ratio | ||
133 | (SNR) of all packets received from this device in dB. | ||
134 | This gives an estimate on a suitable PHY rate. Refer | ||
135 | to [ECMA-368] section 13.3 for more details. | ||
136 | |||
137 | What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/RSSI | ||
138 | Date: July 2008 | ||
139 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
140 | Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org | ||
141 | Description: | ||
142 | Received Signal Strength Indication - the strength of | ||
143 | the received signal in dB. LQE is a more useful | ||
144 | measure of the radio link quality. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi index f27be7d1a49f..e8ffc70ffe12 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi | |||
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Description: | |||
89 | 89 | ||
90 | error - an interrupt that can't be accounted for above. | 90 | error - an interrupt that can't be accounted for above. |
91 | 91 | ||
92 | invalid: it's either a wakeup GPE or a GPE/Fixed Event that | 92 | invalid: it's either a GPE or a Fixed Event that |
93 | doesn't have an event handler. | 93 | doesn't have an event handler. |
94 | 94 | ||
95 | disable: the GPE/Fixed Event is valid but disabled. | 95 | disable: the GPE/Fixed Event is valid but disabled. |
@@ -117,30 +117,30 @@ Description: | |||
117 | and other user space applications so that the machine won't shutdown | 117 | and other user space applications so that the machine won't shutdown |
118 | when pressing the power button. | 118 | when pressing the power button. |
119 | # cat ff_pwr_btn | 119 | # cat ff_pwr_btn |
120 | 0 | 120 | 0 enabled |
121 | # press the power button for 3 times; | 121 | # press the power button for 3 times; |
122 | # cat ff_pwr_btn | 122 | # cat ff_pwr_btn |
123 | 3 | 123 | 3 enabled |
124 | # echo disable > ff_pwr_btn | 124 | # echo disable > ff_pwr_btn |
125 | # cat ff_pwr_btn | 125 | # cat ff_pwr_btn |
126 | disable | 126 | 3 disabled |
127 | # press the power button for 3 times; | 127 | # press the power button for 3 times; |
128 | # cat ff_pwr_btn | 128 | # cat ff_pwr_btn |
129 | disable | 129 | 3 disabled |
130 | # echo enable > ff_pwr_btn | 130 | # echo enable > ff_pwr_btn |
131 | # cat ff_pwr_btn | 131 | # cat ff_pwr_btn |
132 | 4 | 132 | 4 enabled |
133 | /* | 133 | /* |
134 | * this is because the status bit is set even if the enable bit is cleared, | 134 | * this is because the status bit is set even if the enable bit is cleared, |
135 | * and it triggers an ACPI fixed event when the enable bit is set again | 135 | * and it triggers an ACPI fixed event when the enable bit is set again |
136 | */ | 136 | */ |
137 | # press the power button for 3 times; | 137 | # press the power button for 3 times; |
138 | # cat ff_pwr_btn | 138 | # cat ff_pwr_btn |
139 | 7 | 139 | 7 enabled |
140 | # echo disable > ff_pwr_btn | 140 | # echo disable > ff_pwr_btn |
141 | # press the power button for 3 times; | 141 | # press the power button for 3 times; |
142 | # echo clear > ff_pwr_btn /* clear the status bit */ | 142 | # echo clear > ff_pwr_btn /* clear the status bit */ |
143 | # echo disable > ff_pwr_btn | 143 | # echo disable > ff_pwr_btn |
144 | # cat ff_pwr_btn | 144 | # cat ff_pwr_btn |
145 | 7 | 145 | 7 enabled |
146 | 146 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wusb_cbaf b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wusb_cbaf new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a99c5f86a37a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wusb_cbaf | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ | |||
1 | What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_* | ||
2 | Date: August 2008 | ||
3 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
4 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
5 | Description: | ||
6 | Various files for managing Cable Based Association of | ||
7 | (wireless) USB devices. | ||
8 | |||
9 | The sequence of operations should be: | ||
10 | |||
11 | 1. Device is plugged in. | ||
12 | |||
13 | 2. The connection manager (CM) sees a device with CBA capability. | ||
14 | (the wusb_chid etc. files in /sys/devices/blah/OURDEVICE). | ||
15 | |||
16 | 3. The CM writes the host name, supported band groups, | ||
17 | and the CHID (host ID) into the wusb_host_name, | ||
18 | wusb_host_band_groups and wusb_chid files. These | ||
19 | get sent to the device and the CDID (if any) for | ||
20 | this host is requested. | ||
21 | |||
22 | 4. The CM can verify that the device's supported band | ||
23 | groups (wusb_device_band_groups) are compatible | ||
24 | with the host. | ||
25 | |||
26 | 5. The CM reads the wusb_cdid file. | ||
27 | |||
28 | 6. The CM looks it up its database. | ||
29 | |||
30 | - If it has a matching CHID,CDID entry, the device | ||
31 | has been authorized before and nothing further | ||
32 | needs to be done. | ||
33 | |||
34 | - If the CDID is zero (or the CM doesn't find a | ||
35 | matching CDID in its database), the device is | ||
36 | assumed to be not known. The CM may associate | ||
37 | the host with device by: writing a randomly | ||
38 | generated CDID to wusb_cdid and then a random CK | ||
39 | to wusb_ck (this uploads the new CC to the | ||
40 | device). | ||
41 | |||
42 | CMD may choose to prompt the user before | ||
43 | associating with a new device. | ||
44 | |||
45 | 7. Device is unplugged. | ||
46 | |||
47 | References: | ||
48 | [WUSB-AM] Association Models Supplement to the | ||
49 | Certified Wireless Universal Serial Bus | ||
50 | Specification, version 1.0. | ||
51 | |||
52 | What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_chid | ||
53 | Date: August 2008 | ||
54 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
55 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
56 | Description: | ||
57 | The CHID of the host formatted as 16 space-separated | ||
58 | hex octets. | ||
59 | |||
60 | Writes fetches device's supported band groups and the | ||
61 | the CDID for any existing association with this host. | ||
62 | |||
63 | What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_host_name | ||
64 | Date: August 2008 | ||
65 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
66 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
67 | Description: | ||
68 | A friendly name for the host as a UTF-8 encoded string. | ||
69 | |||
70 | What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_host_band_groups | ||
71 | Date: August 2008 | ||
72 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
73 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
74 | Description: | ||
75 | The band groups supported by the host, in the format | ||
76 | defined in [WUSB-AM]. | ||
77 | |||
78 | What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_device_band_groups | ||
79 | Date: August 2008 | ||
80 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
81 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
82 | Description: | ||
83 | The band groups supported by the device, in the format | ||
84 | defined in [WUSB-AM]. | ||
85 | |||
86 | What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_cdid | ||
87 | Date: August 2008 | ||
88 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
89 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
90 | Description: | ||
91 | The device's CDID formatted as 16 space-separated hex | ||
92 | octets. | ||
93 | |||
94 | What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_ck | ||
95 | Date: August 2008 | ||
96 | KernelVersion: 2.6.27 | ||
97 | Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com> | ||
98 | Description: | ||
99 | Write 16 space-separated random, hex octets to | ||
100 | associate with the device. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index b8e86460046e..b462bb149543 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt | |||
@@ -316,12 +316,10 @@ reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later). | |||
316 | pci_map_sg(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg, | 316 | pci_map_sg(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg, |
317 | int nents, int direction) | 317 | int nents, int direction) |
318 | 318 | ||
319 | Maps a scatter gather list from the block layer. | ||
320 | |||
321 | Returns: the number of physical segments mapped (this may be shorter | 319 | Returns: the number of physical segments mapped (this may be shorter |
322 | than <nents> passed in if the block layer determines that some | 320 | than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are |
323 | elements of the scatter/gather list are physically adjacent and thus | 321 | physically or virtually adjacent and an IOMMU maps them with a single |
324 | may be mapped with a single entry). | 322 | entry). |
325 | 323 | ||
326 | Please note that the sg cannot be mapped again if it has been mapped once. | 324 | Please note that the sg cannot be mapped again if it has been mapped once. |
327 | The mapping process is allowed to destroy information in the sg. | 325 | The mapping process is allowed to destroy information in the sg. |
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index fabc06466b93..9b1f6ca100d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile | |||
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ quiet_cmd_db2ps = PS $@ | |||
136 | %.ps : %.xml | 136 | %.ps : %.xml |
137 | $(call cmd,db2ps) | 137 | $(call cmd,db2ps) |
138 | 138 | ||
139 | quiet_cmd_db2pdf = PDF $@ | 139 | quiet_cmd_db2pdf = PDF $@ |
140 | cmd_db2pdf = $(subst TYPE,pdf, $($(PDF_METHOD)template)) | 140 | cmd_db2pdf = $(subst TYPE,pdf, $($(PDF_METHOD)template)) |
141 | %.pdf : %.xml | 141 | %.pdf : %.xml |
142 | $(call cmd,db2pdf) | 142 | $(call cmd,db2pdf) |
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ build_main_index = rm -rf $(main_idx) && \ | |||
148 | echo '<h2>Kernel Version: $(KERNELVERSION)</h2>' >> $(main_idx) && \ | 148 | echo '<h2>Kernel Version: $(KERNELVERSION)</h2>' >> $(main_idx) && \ |
149 | cat $(HTML) >> $(main_idx) | 149 | cat $(HTML) >> $(main_idx) |
150 | 150 | ||
151 | quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@ | 151 | quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@ |
152 | cmd_db2html = xmlto xhtml $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(patsubst %.html,%,$@) $< && \ | 152 | cmd_db2html = xmlto xhtml $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(patsubst %.html,%,$@) $< && \ |
153 | echo '<a HREF="$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))/index.html"> \ | 153 | echo '<a HREF="$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))/index.html"> \ |
154 | $(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))</a><p>' > $@ | 154 | $(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))</a><p>' > $@ |
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl index 9ee6f3cbb414..3ed88126ab8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl | |||
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ | |||
24 | <surname>Cox</surname> | 24 | <surname>Cox</surname> |
25 | <affiliation> | 25 | <affiliation> |
26 | <address> | 26 | <address> |
27 | <email>alan@redhat.com</email> | 27 | <email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email> |
28 | </address> | 28 | </address> |
29 | </affiliation> | 29 | </affiliation> |
30 | </author> | 30 | </author> |
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ CPU B: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags) | |||
316 | 316 | ||
317 | <chapter id="pubfunctions"> | 317 | <chapter id="pubfunctions"> |
318 | <title>Public Functions Provided</title> | 318 | <title>Public Functions Provided</title> |
319 | !Iinclude/asm-x86/io_32.h | 319 | !Iarch/x86/include/asm/io_32.h |
320 | !Elib/iomap.c | 320 | !Elib/iomap.c |
321 | </chapter> | 321 | </chapter> |
322 | 322 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index 9d0058e788e5..5818ff75786a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl | |||
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ | |||
45 | </sect1> | 45 | </sect1> |
46 | 46 | ||
47 | <sect1><title>Atomic and pointer manipulation</title> | 47 | <sect1><title>Atomic and pointer manipulation</title> |
48 | !Iinclude/asm-x86/atomic_32.h | 48 | !Iarch/x86/include/asm/atomic_32.h |
49 | !Iinclude/asm-x86/unaligned.h | 49 | !Iarch/x86/include/asm/unaligned.h |
50 | </sect1> | 50 | </sect1> |
51 | 51 | ||
52 | <sect1><title>Delaying, scheduling, and timer routines</title> | 52 | <sect1><title>Delaying, scheduling, and timer routines</title> |
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ X!Ilib/string.c | |||
119 | !Elib/string.c | 119 | !Elib/string.c |
120 | </sect1> | 120 | </sect1> |
121 | <sect1><title>Bit Operations</title> | 121 | <sect1><title>Bit Operations</title> |
122 | !Iinclude/asm-x86/bitops.h | 122 | !Iarch/x86/include/asm/bitops.h |
123 | </sect1> | 123 | </sect1> |
124 | </chapter> | 124 | </chapter> |
125 | 125 | ||
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ X!Ilib/string.c | |||
155 | !Emm/slab.c | 155 | !Emm/slab.c |
156 | </sect1> | 156 | </sect1> |
157 | <sect1><title>User Space Memory Access</title> | 157 | <sect1><title>User Space Memory Access</title> |
158 | !Iinclude/asm-x86/uaccess_32.h | 158 | !Iarch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h |
159 | !Earch/x86/lib/usercopy_32.c | 159 | !Earch/x86/lib/usercopy_32.c |
160 | </sect1> | 160 | </sect1> |
161 | <sect1><title>More Memory Management Functions</title> | 161 | <sect1><title>More Memory Management Functions</title> |
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c | |||
265 | --> | 265 | --> |
266 | </sect2> | 266 | </sect2> |
267 | <sect2><title>MCA Bus DMA</title> | 267 | <sect2><title>MCA Bus DMA</title> |
268 | !Iinclude/asm-x86/mca_dma.h | 268 | !Iarch/x86/include/asm/mca_dma.h |
269 | </sect2> | 269 | </sect2> |
270 | </sect1> | 270 | </sect1> |
271 | </chapter> | 271 | </chapter> |
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl index ae15d55350ec..a50d6cd58573 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl | |||
@@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = { | |||
1239 | </para> | 1239 | </para> |
1240 | 1240 | ||
1241 | <para> | 1241 | <para> |
1242 | <filename>include/asm-x86/delay_32.h:</filename> | 1242 | <filename>arch/x86/include/asm/delay.h:</filename> |
1243 | </para> | 1243 | </para> |
1244 | <programlisting> | 1244 | <programlisting> |
1245 | #define ndelay(n) (__builtin_constant_p(n) ? \ | 1245 | #define ndelay(n) (__builtin_constant_p(n) ? \ |
@@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = { | |||
1265 | </programlisting> | 1265 | </programlisting> |
1266 | 1266 | ||
1267 | <para> | 1267 | <para> |
1268 | <filename>include/asm-x86/uaccess_32.h:</filename> | 1268 | <filename>arch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h:</filename> |
1269 | </para> | 1269 | </para> |
1270 | 1270 | ||
1271 | <programlisting> | 1271 | <programlisting> |
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl index 529a53dc1389..467ccac6ec50 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl | |||
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ | |||
12 | <surname>Cox</surname> | 12 | <surname>Cox</surname> |
13 | <affiliation> | 13 | <affiliation> |
14 | <address> | 14 | <address> |
15 | <email>alan@redhat.com</email> | 15 | <email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email> |
16 | </address> | 16 | </address> |
17 | </affiliation> | 17 | </affiliation> |
18 | </author> | 18 | </author> |
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ | |||
101 | 101 | ||
102 | <chapter id="dmafunctions"> | 102 | <chapter id="dmafunctions"> |
103 | <title>DMA Functions Provided</title> | 103 | <title>DMA Functions Provided</title> |
104 | !Iinclude/asm-x86/mca_dma.h | 104 | !Iarch/x86/include/asm/mca_dma.h |
105 | </chapter> | 105 | </chapter> |
106 | 106 | ||
107 | </book> | 107 | </book> |
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl index 9eebcc304de4..8c93db122f04 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl | |||
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ | |||
12 | <surname>Cox</surname> | 12 | <surname>Cox</surname> |
13 | <affiliation> | 13 | <affiliation> |
14 | <address> | 14 | <address> |
15 | <email>alan@redhat.com</email> | 15 | <email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email> |
16 | </address> | 16 | </address> |
17 | </affiliation> | 17 | </affiliation> |
18 | </author> | 18 | </author> |
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl index a42a8a4c7689..6f3883be877e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl | |||
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ | |||
12 | <surname>Cox</surname> | 12 | <surname>Cox</surname> |
13 | <affiliation> | 13 | <affiliation> |
14 | <address> | 14 | <address> |
15 | <email>alan@redhat.com</email> | 15 | <email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email> |
16 | </address> | 16 | </address> |
17 | </affiliation> | 17 | </affiliation> |
18 | </author> | 18 | </author> |
diff --git a/Documentation/ManagementStyle b/Documentation/ManagementStyle index 49a8efa5afeb..a5f0ea58c788 100644 --- a/Documentation/ManagementStyle +++ b/Documentation/ManagementStyle | |||
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ companies. If you sign purchase orders or you have any clue about the | |||
17 | budget of your group, you're almost certainly not a kernel manager. | 17 | budget of your group, you're almost certainly not a kernel manager. |
18 | These suggestions may or may not apply to you. | 18 | These suggestions may or may not apply to you. |
19 | 19 | ||
20 | First off, I'd suggest buying "Seven Habits of Highly Successful | 20 | First off, I'd suggest buying "Seven Habits of Highly Effective |
21 | People", and NOT read it. Burn it, it's a great symbolic gesture. | 21 | People", and NOT read it. Burn it, it's a great symbolic gesture. |
22 | 22 | ||
23 | (*) This document does so not so much by answering the question, but by | 23 | (*) This document does so not so much by answering the question, but by |
diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX b/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX index 49f43946c6b6..812b17fe3ed0 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX | |||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@ | |||
1 | 00-INDEX | 1 | 00-INDEX |
2 | - this file | 2 | - this file |
3 | MSI-HOWTO.txt | ||
4 | - the Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) Driver Guide HOWTO and FAQ. | ||
3 | PCI-DMA-mapping.txt | 5 | PCI-DMA-mapping.txt |
4 | - info for PCI drivers using DMA portably across all platforms | 6 | - info for PCI drivers using DMA portably across all platforms |
5 | PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt | 7 | PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt |
diff --git a/Documentation/MSI-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt index 256defd7e174..256defd7e174 100644 --- a/Documentation/MSI-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/.gitignore b/Documentation/accounting/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..86485203c4ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/accounting/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
getdelays | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt b/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..65bf47c46b6d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ | |||
1 | ACPI Debug Output | ||
2 | |||
3 | |||
4 | The ACPI CA, the Linux ACPI core, and some ACPI drivers can generate debug | ||
5 | output. This document describes how to use this facility. | ||
6 | |||
7 | Compile-time configuration | ||
8 | -------------------------- | ||
9 | |||
10 | ACPI debug output is globally enabled by CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG. If this config | ||
11 | option is turned off, the debug messages are not even built into the | ||
12 | kernel. | ||
13 | |||
14 | Boot- and run-time configuration | ||
15 | -------------------------------- | ||
16 | |||
17 | When CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG=y, you can select the component and level of messages | ||
18 | you're interested in. At boot-time, use the acpi.debug_layer and | ||
19 | acpi.debug_level kernel command line options. After boot, you can use the | ||
20 | debug_layer and debug_level files in /sys/module/acpi/parameters/ to control | ||
21 | the debug messages. | ||
22 | |||
23 | debug_layer (component) | ||
24 | ----------------------- | ||
25 | |||
26 | The "debug_layer" is a mask that selects components of interest, e.g., a | ||
27 | specific driver or part of the ACPI interpreter. To build the debug_layer | ||
28 | bitmask, look for the "#define _COMPONENT" in an ACPI source file. | ||
29 | |||
30 | You can set the debug_layer mask at boot-time using the acpi.debug_layer | ||
31 | command line argument, and you can change it after boot by writing values | ||
32 | to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer. | ||
33 | |||
34 | The possible components are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h and | ||
35 | include/acpi/acpi_drivers.h. Reading /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer | ||
36 | shows the supported mask values, currently these: | ||
37 | |||
38 | ACPI_UTILITIES 0x00000001 | ||
39 | ACPI_HARDWARE 0x00000002 | ||
40 | ACPI_EVENTS 0x00000004 | ||
41 | ACPI_TABLES 0x00000008 | ||
42 | ACPI_NAMESPACE 0x00000010 | ||
43 | ACPI_PARSER 0x00000020 | ||
44 | ACPI_DISPATCHER 0x00000040 | ||
45 | ACPI_EXECUTER 0x00000080 | ||
46 | ACPI_RESOURCES 0x00000100 | ||
47 | ACPI_CA_DEBUGGER 0x00000200 | ||
48 | ACPI_OS_SERVICES 0x00000400 | ||
49 | ACPI_CA_DISASSEMBLER 0x00000800 | ||
50 | ACPI_COMPILER 0x00001000 | ||
51 | ACPI_TOOLS 0x00002000 | ||
52 | ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT 0x00010000 | ||
53 | ACPI_AC_COMPONENT 0x00020000 | ||
54 | ACPI_BATTERY_COMPONENT 0x00040000 | ||
55 | ACPI_BUTTON_COMPONENT 0x00080000 | ||
56 | ACPI_SBS_COMPONENT 0x00100000 | ||
57 | ACPI_FAN_COMPONENT 0x00200000 | ||
58 | ACPI_PCI_COMPONENT 0x00400000 | ||
59 | ACPI_POWER_COMPONENT 0x00800000 | ||
60 | ACPI_CONTAINER_COMPONENT 0x01000000 | ||
61 | ACPI_SYSTEM_COMPONENT 0x02000000 | ||
62 | ACPI_THERMAL_COMPONENT 0x04000000 | ||
63 | ACPI_MEMORY_DEVICE_COMPONENT 0x08000000 | ||
64 | ACPI_VIDEO_COMPONENT 0x10000000 | ||
65 | ACPI_PROCESSOR_COMPONENT 0x20000000 | ||
66 | |||
67 | debug_level | ||
68 | ----------- | ||
69 | |||
70 | The "debug_level" is a mask that selects different types of messages, e.g., | ||
71 | those related to initialization, method execution, informational messages, etc. | ||
72 | To build debug_level, look at the level specified in an ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT() | ||
73 | statement. | ||
74 | |||
75 | The ACPI interpreter uses several different levels, but the Linux | ||
76 | ACPI core and ACPI drivers generally only use ACPI_LV_INFO. | ||
77 | |||
78 | You can set the debug_level mask at boot-time using the acpi.debug_level | ||
79 | command line argument, and you can change it after boot by writing values | ||
80 | to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level. | ||
81 | |||
82 | The possible levels are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h. Reading | ||
83 | /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level shows the supported mask values, | ||
84 | currently these: | ||
85 | |||
86 | ACPI_LV_INIT 0x00000001 | ||
87 | ACPI_LV_DEBUG_OBJECT 0x00000002 | ||
88 | ACPI_LV_INFO 0x00000004 | ||
89 | ACPI_LV_INIT_NAMES 0x00000020 | ||
90 | ACPI_LV_PARSE 0x00000040 | ||
91 | ACPI_LV_LOAD 0x00000080 | ||
92 | ACPI_LV_DISPATCH 0x00000100 | ||
93 | ACPI_LV_EXEC 0x00000200 | ||
94 | ACPI_LV_NAMES 0x00000400 | ||
95 | ACPI_LV_OPREGION 0x00000800 | ||
96 | ACPI_LV_BFIELD 0x00001000 | ||
97 | ACPI_LV_TABLES 0x00002000 | ||
98 | ACPI_LV_VALUES 0x00004000 | ||
99 | ACPI_LV_OBJECTS 0x00008000 | ||
100 | ACPI_LV_RESOURCES 0x00010000 | ||
101 | ACPI_LV_USER_REQUESTS 0x00020000 | ||
102 | ACPI_LV_PACKAGE 0x00040000 | ||
103 | ACPI_LV_ALLOCATIONS 0x00100000 | ||
104 | ACPI_LV_FUNCTIONS 0x00200000 | ||
105 | ACPI_LV_OPTIMIZATIONS 0x00400000 | ||
106 | ACPI_LV_MUTEX 0x01000000 | ||
107 | ACPI_LV_THREADS 0x02000000 | ||
108 | ACPI_LV_IO 0x04000000 | ||
109 | ACPI_LV_INTERRUPTS 0x08000000 | ||
110 | ACPI_LV_AML_DISASSEMBLE 0x10000000 | ||
111 | ACPI_LV_VERBOSE_INFO 0x20000000 | ||
112 | ACPI_LV_FULL_TABLES 0x40000000 | ||
113 | ACPI_LV_EVENTS 0x80000000 | ||
114 | |||
115 | Examples | ||
116 | -------- | ||
117 | |||
118 | For example, drivers/acpi/bus.c contains this: | ||
119 | |||
120 | #define _COMPONENT ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT | ||
121 | ... | ||
122 | ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT((ACPI_DB_INFO, "Device insertion detected\n")); | ||
123 | |||
124 | To turn on this message, set the ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT bit in acpi.debug_layer | ||
125 | and the ACPI_LV_INFO bit in acpi.debug_level. (The ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT | ||
126 | statement uses ACPI_DB_INFO, which is macro based on the ACPI_LV_INFO | ||
127 | definition.) | ||
128 | |||
129 | Enable all AML "Debug" output (stores to the Debug object while interpreting | ||
130 | AML) during boot: | ||
131 | |||
132 | acpi.debug_layer=0xffffffff acpi.debug_level=0x2 | ||
133 | |||
134 | Enable PCI and PCI interrupt routing debug messages: | ||
135 | |||
136 | acpi.debug_layer=0x400000 acpi.debug_level=0x4 | ||
137 | |||
138 | Enable all ACPI hardware-related messages: | ||
139 | |||
140 | acpi.debug_layer=0x2 acpi.debug_level=0xffffffff | ||
141 | |||
142 | Enable all ACPI_DB_INFO messages after boot: | ||
143 | |||
144 | # echo 0x4 > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level | ||
145 | |||
146 | Show all valid component values: | ||
147 | |||
148 | # cat /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/empeg/README b/Documentation/arm/empeg/README deleted file mode 100644 index 09cc8d03ae58..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/empeg/README +++ /dev/null | |||
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ | |||
1 | Empeg, Ltd's Empeg MP3 Car Audio Player | ||
2 | |||
3 | The initial design is to go in your car, but you can use it at home, on a | ||
4 | boat... almost anywhere. The principle is to store CD-quality music using | ||
5 | MPEG technology onto a hard disk in the unit, and use the power of the | ||
6 | embedded computer to serve up the music you want. | ||
7 | |||
8 | For more details, see: | ||
9 | |||
10 | http://www.empeg.com | ||
11 | |||
12 | |||
13 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/empeg/ir.txt b/Documentation/arm/empeg/ir.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 10a297450164..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/empeg/ir.txt +++ /dev/null | |||
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ | |||
1 | Infra-red driver documentation. | ||
2 | |||
3 | Mike Crowe <mac@empeg.com> | ||
4 | (C) Empeg Ltd 1999 | ||
5 | |||
6 | Not a lot here yet :-) | ||
7 | |||
8 | The Kenwood KCA-R6A remote control generates a sequence like the following: | ||
9 | |||
10 | Go low for approx 16T (Around 9000us) | ||
11 | Go high for approx 8T (Around 4000us) | ||
12 | Go low for less than 2T (Around 750us) | ||
13 | |||
14 | For each of the 32 bits | ||
15 | Go high for more than 2T (Around 1500us) == 1 | ||
16 | Go high for less than T (Around 400us) == 0 | ||
17 | Go low for less than 2T (Around 750us) | ||
18 | |||
19 | Rather than repeat a signal when the button is held down certain buttons | ||
20 | generate the following code to indicate repetition. | ||
21 | |||
22 | Go low for approx 16T | ||
23 | Go high for approx 4T | ||
24 | Go low for less than 2T | ||
25 | |||
26 | (By removing the <2T from the start of the sequence and placing at the end | ||
27 | it can be considered a stop bit but I found it easier to deal with it at | ||
28 | the start). | ||
29 | |||
30 | The 32 bits are encoded as XxYy where x and y are the actual data values | ||
31 | while X and Y are the logical inverses of the associated data values. Using | ||
32 | LSB first yields sensible codes for the numbers. | ||
33 | |||
34 | All codes are of the form b9xx | ||
35 | |||
36 | The numeric keys generate the code 0x where x is the number pressed. | ||
37 | |||
38 | Tuner 1c | ||
39 | Tape 1d | ||
40 | CD 1e | ||
41 | CD-MD-CH 1f | ||
42 | Track- 0a | ||
43 | Track+ 0b | ||
44 | Rewind 0c | ||
45 | FF 0d | ||
46 | DNPP 5e | ||
47 | Play/Pause 0e | ||
48 | Vol+ 14 | ||
49 | Vol- 15 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/empeg/mkdevs b/Documentation/arm/empeg/mkdevs deleted file mode 100644 index 7a85e28d14f3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/empeg/mkdevs +++ /dev/null | |||
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@ | |||
1 | #!/bin/sh | ||
2 | mknod /dev/display c 244 0 | ||
3 | mknod /dev/ir c 242 0 | ||
4 | mknod /dev/usb0 c 243 0 | ||
5 | mknod /dev/audio c 245 4 | ||
6 | mknod /dev/dsp c 245 3 | ||
7 | mknod /dev/mixer c 245 0 | ||
8 | mknod /dev/empeg_state c 246 0 | ||
9 | mknod /dev/radio0 c 81 64 | ||
10 | ln -sf radio0 radio | ||
11 | ln -sf usb0 usb | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment b/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment index d145ccca169a..c7c7a114c78c 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment +++ b/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment | |||
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ real bad - it changes the behaviour of all unaligned instructions in user | |||
24 | space, and might cause programs to fail unexpectedly. | 24 | space, and might cause programs to fail unexpectedly. |
25 | 25 | ||
26 | To change the alignment trap behavior, simply echo a number into | 26 | To change the alignment trap behavior, simply echo a number into |
27 | /proc/sys/debug/alignment. The number is made up from various bits: | 27 | /proc/cpu/alignment. The number is made up from various bits: |
28 | 28 | ||
29 | bit behavior when set | 29 | bit behavior when set |
30 | --- ----------------- | 30 | --- ----------------- |
diff --git a/Documentation/auxdisplay/.gitignore b/Documentation/auxdisplay/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7af222860a96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/auxdisplay/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
cfag12864b-example | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/00-INDEX b/Documentation/blockdev/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..86f054c47013 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/00-INDEX | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ | |||
1 | 00-INDEX | ||
2 | - this file | ||
3 | README.DAC960 | ||
4 | - info on Mylex DAC960/DAC1100 PCI RAID Controller Driver for Linux. | ||
5 | cciss.txt | ||
6 | - info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers. | ||
7 | cpqarray.txt | ||
8 | - info on using Compaq's SMART2 Intelligent Disk Array Controllers. | ||
9 | floppy.txt | ||
10 | - notes and driver options for the floppy disk driver. | ||
11 | nbd.txt | ||
12 | - info on a TCP implementation of a network block device. | ||
13 | paride.txt | ||
14 | - information about the parallel port IDE subsystem. | ||
15 | ramdisk.txt | ||
16 | - short guide on how to set up and use the RAM disk. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/README.DAC960 b/Documentation/blockdev/README.DAC960 index 0e8f618ab534..0e8f618ab534 100644 --- a/Documentation/README.DAC960 +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/README.DAC960 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/cciss.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt index 8244c6442faa..89698e8df7d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/cciss.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt | |||
@@ -21,11 +21,14 @@ This driver is known to work with the following cards: | |||
21 | * SA E200 | 21 | * SA E200 |
22 | * SA E200i | 22 | * SA E200i |
23 | * SA E500 | 23 | * SA E500 |
24 | * SA P700m | ||
24 | * SA P212 | 25 | * SA P212 |
25 | * SA P410 | 26 | * SA P410 |
26 | * SA P410i | 27 | * SA P410i |
27 | * SA P411 | 28 | * SA P411 |
28 | * SA P812 | 29 | * SA P812 |
30 | * SA P712m | ||
31 | * SA P711m | ||
29 | 32 | ||
30 | Detecting drive failures: | 33 | Detecting drive failures: |
31 | ------------------------- | 34 | ------------------------- |
diff --git a/Documentation/cpqarray.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/cpqarray.txt index c7154e20ef5e..c7154e20ef5e 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpqarray.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/cpqarray.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/floppy.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt index 6ccab88705cb..6ccab88705cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/floppy.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/nbd.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt index aeb93ffe6416..aeb93ffe6416 100644 --- a/Documentation/nbd.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/paride.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt index e4312676bdda..e4312676bdda 100644 --- a/Documentation/paride.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/ramdisk.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt index 6c820baa19a6..6c820baa19a6 100644 --- a/Documentation/ramdisk.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/c2port.txt b/Documentation/c2port.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d9bf93ea4398 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/c2port.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ | |||
1 | C2 port support | ||
2 | --------------- | ||
3 | |||
4 | (C) Copyright 2007 Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@enneenne.com> | ||
5 | |||
6 | This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | ||
7 | it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | ||
8 | the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or | ||
9 | (at your option) any later version. | ||
10 | |||
11 | This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | ||
12 | but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | ||
13 | MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | ||
14 | GNU General Public License for more details. | ||
15 | |||
16 | |||
17 | |||
18 | Overview | ||
19 | -------- | ||
20 | |||
21 | This driver implements the support for Linux of Silicon Labs (Silabs) | ||
22 | C2 Interface used for in-system programming of micro controllers. | ||
23 | |||
24 | By using this driver you can reprogram the in-system flash without EC2 | ||
25 | or EC3 debug adapter. This solution is also useful in those systems | ||
26 | where the micro controller is connected via special GPIOs pins. | ||
27 | |||
28 | References | ||
29 | ---------- | ||
30 | |||
31 | The C2 Interface main references are at (http://www.silabs.com) | ||
32 | Silicon Laboratories site], see: | ||
33 | |||
34 | - AN127: FLASH Programming via the C2 Interface at | ||
35 | http://www.silabs.com/public/documents/tpub_doc/anote/Microcontrollers/Small_Form_Factor/en/an127.pdf, and | ||
36 | |||
37 | - C2 Specification at | ||
38 | http://www.silabs.com/public/documents/tpub_doc/spec/Microcontrollers/en/C2spec.pdf, | ||
39 | |||
40 | however it implements a two wire serial communication protocol (bit | ||
41 | banging) designed to enable in-system programming, debugging, and | ||
42 | boundary-scan testing on low pin-count Silicon Labs devices. Currently | ||
43 | this code supports only flash programming but extensions are easy to | ||
44 | add. | ||
45 | |||
46 | Using the driver | ||
47 | ---------------- | ||
48 | |||
49 | Once the driver is loaded you can use sysfs support to get C2port's | ||
50 | info or read/write in-system flash. | ||
51 | |||
52 | # ls /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/ | ||
53 | access flash_block_size flash_erase rev_id | ||
54 | dev_id flash_blocks_num flash_size subsystem/ | ||
55 | flash_access flash_data reset uevent | ||
56 | |||
57 | Initially the C2port access is disabled since you hardware may have | ||
58 | such lines multiplexed with other devices so, to get access to the | ||
59 | C2port, you need the command: | ||
60 | |||
61 | # echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/access | ||
62 | |||
63 | after that you should read the device ID and revision ID of the | ||
64 | connected micro controller: | ||
65 | |||
66 | # cat /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/dev_id | ||
67 | 8 | ||
68 | # cat /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/rev_id | ||
69 | 1 | ||
70 | |||
71 | However, for security reasons, the in-system flash access in not | ||
72 | enabled yet, to do so you need the command: | ||
73 | |||
74 | # echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_access | ||
75 | |||
76 | After that you can read the whole flash: | ||
77 | |||
78 | # cat /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_data > image | ||
79 | |||
80 | erase it: | ||
81 | |||
82 | # echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_erase | ||
83 | |||
84 | and write it: | ||
85 | |||
86 | # cat image > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_data | ||
87 | |||
88 | after writing you have to reset the device to execute the new code: | ||
89 | |||
90 | # echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/reset | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt index c50ab58b72eb..41f37fea1276 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt | |||
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ | |||
1 | The cgroup freezer is useful to batch job management system which start | 1 | The cgroup freezer is useful to batch job management system which start |
2 | and stop sets of tasks in order to schedule the resources of a machine | 2 | and stop sets of tasks in order to schedule the resources of a machine |
3 | according to the desires of a system administrator. This sort of program | 3 | according to the desires of a system administrator. This sort of program |
4 | is often used on HPC clusters to schedule access to the cluster as a | 4 | is often used on HPC clusters to schedule access to the cluster as a |
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ whole. The cgroup freezer uses cgroups to describe the set of tasks to | |||
6 | be started/stopped by the batch job management system. It also provides | 6 | be started/stopped by the batch job management system. It also provides |
7 | a means to start and stop the tasks composing the job. | 7 | a means to start and stop the tasks composing the job. |
8 | 8 | ||
9 | The cgroup freezer will also be useful for checkpointing running groups | 9 | The cgroup freezer will also be useful for checkpointing running groups |
10 | of tasks. The freezer allows the checkpoint code to obtain a consistent | 10 | of tasks. The freezer allows the checkpoint code to obtain a consistent |
11 | image of the tasks by attempting to force the tasks in a cgroup into a | 11 | image of the tasks by attempting to force the tasks in a cgroup into a |
12 | quiescent state. Once the tasks are quiescent another task can | 12 | quiescent state. Once the tasks are quiescent another task can |
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ recoverable error occur. This also allows the checkpointed tasks to be | |||
16 | migrated between nodes in a cluster by copying the gathered information | 16 | migrated between nodes in a cluster by copying the gathered information |
17 | to another node and restarting the tasks there. | 17 | to another node and restarting the tasks there. |
18 | 18 | ||
19 | Sequences of SIGSTOP and SIGCONT are not always sufficient for stopping | 19 | Sequences of SIGSTOP and SIGCONT are not always sufficient for stopping |
20 | and resuming tasks in userspace. Both of these signals are observable | 20 | and resuming tasks in userspace. Both of these signals are observable |
21 | from within the tasks we wish to freeze. While SIGSTOP cannot be caught, | 21 | from within the tasks we wish to freeze. While SIGSTOP cannot be caught, |
22 | blocked, or ignored it can be seen by waiting or ptracing parent tasks. | 22 | blocked, or ignored it can be seen by waiting or ptracing parent tasks. |
@@ -37,26 +37,29 @@ demonstrate this problem using nested bash shells: | |||
37 | 37 | ||
38 | <at this point 16990 exits and causes 16644 to exit too> | 38 | <at this point 16990 exits and causes 16644 to exit too> |
39 | 39 | ||
40 | This happens because bash can observe both signals and choose how it | 40 | This happens because bash can observe both signals and choose how it |
41 | responds to them. | 41 | responds to them. |
42 | 42 | ||
43 | Another example of a program which catches and responds to these | 43 | Another example of a program which catches and responds to these |
44 | signals is gdb. In fact any program designed to use ptrace is likely to | 44 | signals is gdb. In fact any program designed to use ptrace is likely to |
45 | have a problem with this method of stopping and resuming tasks. | 45 | have a problem with this method of stopping and resuming tasks. |
46 | 46 | ||
47 | In contrast, the cgroup freezer uses the kernel freezer code to | 47 | In contrast, the cgroup freezer uses the kernel freezer code to |
48 | prevent the freeze/unfreeze cycle from becoming visible to the tasks | 48 | prevent the freeze/unfreeze cycle from becoming visible to the tasks |
49 | being frozen. This allows the bash example above and gdb to run as | 49 | being frozen. This allows the bash example above and gdb to run as |
50 | expected. | 50 | expected. |
51 | 51 | ||
52 | The freezer subsystem in the container filesystem defines a file named | 52 | The freezer subsystem in the container filesystem defines a file named |
53 | freezer.state. Writing "FROZEN" to the state file will freeze all tasks in the | 53 | freezer.state. Writing "FROZEN" to the state file will freeze all tasks in the |
54 | cgroup. Subsequently writing "THAWED" will unfreeze the tasks in the cgroup. | 54 | cgroup. Subsequently writing "THAWED" will unfreeze the tasks in the cgroup. |
55 | Reading will return the current state. | 55 | Reading will return the current state. |
56 | 56 | ||
57 | Note freezer.state doesn't exist in root cgroup, which means root cgroup | ||
58 | is non-freezable. | ||
59 | |||
57 | * Examples of usage : | 60 | * Examples of usage : |
58 | 61 | ||
59 | # mkdir /containers/freezer | 62 | # mkdir /containers |
60 | # mount -t cgroup -ofreezer freezer /containers | 63 | # mount -t cgroup -ofreezer freezer /containers |
61 | # mkdir /containers/0 | 64 | # mkdir /containers/0 |
62 | # echo $some_pid > /containers/0/tasks | 65 | # echo $some_pid > /containers/0/tasks |
@@ -94,6 +97,6 @@ things happens: | |||
94 | the freezer.state file | 97 | the freezer.state file |
95 | 2) Userspace retries the freezing operation by writing "FROZEN" to | 98 | 2) Userspace retries the freezing operation by writing "FROZEN" to |
96 | the freezer.state file (writing "FREEZING" is not legal | 99 | the freezer.state file (writing "FREEZING" is not legal |
97 | and returns EIO) | 100 | and returns EINVAL) |
98 | 3) The tasks that blocked the cgroup from entering the "FROZEN" | 101 | 3) The tasks that blocked the cgroup from entering the "FROZEN" |
99 | state disappear from the cgroup's set of tasks. | 102 | state disappear from the cgroup's set of tasks. |
diff --git a/Documentation/connector/.gitignore b/Documentation/connector/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d2b9c32accd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/connector/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
ucon | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt index 6c442d8426b5..4f3f3840320e 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt | |||
@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ Contents: | |||
23 | 1.3 sparc64 | 23 | 1.3 sparc64 |
24 | 1.4 ppc | 24 | 1.4 ppc |
25 | 1.5 SuperH | 25 | 1.5 SuperH |
26 | 1.6 Blackfin | ||
26 | 27 | ||
27 | 2. "Policy" / "Governor"? | 28 | 2. "Policy" / "Governor"? |
28 | 2.1 Policy | 29 | 2.1 Policy |
@@ -97,6 +98,17 @@ The following SuperH processors are supported by cpufreq: | |||
97 | SH-3 | 98 | SH-3 |
98 | SH-4 | 99 | SH-4 |
99 | 100 | ||
101 | 1.6 Blackfin | ||
102 | ------------ | ||
103 | |||
104 | The following Blackfin processors are supported by cpufreq: | ||
105 | |||
106 | BF522, BF523, BF524, BF525, BF526, BF527, Rev 0.1 or higher | ||
107 | BF531, BF532, BF533, Rev 0.3 or higher | ||
108 | BF534, BF536, BF537, Rev 0.2 or higher | ||
109 | BF561, Rev 0.3 or higher | ||
110 | BF542, BF544, BF547, BF548, BF549, Rev 0.1 or higher | ||
111 | |||
100 | 112 | ||
101 | 2. "Policy" / "Governor" ? | 113 | 2. "Policy" / "Governor" ? |
102 | ========================== | 114 | ========================== |
diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt index 2ebb94d6ed8e..a618efab7b15 100644 --- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt +++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt | |||
@@ -213,4 +213,29 @@ TkRat (GUI) | |||
213 | 213 | ||
214 | Works. Use "Insert file..." or external editor. | 214 | Works. Use "Insert file..." or external editor. |
215 | 215 | ||
216 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
217 | Gmail (Web GUI) | ||
218 | |||
219 | If you just have to use Gmail to send patches, it CAN be made to work. It | ||
220 | requires a bit of external help, though. | ||
221 | |||
222 | The first problem is that Gmail converts tabs to spaces. This will | ||
223 | totally break your patches. To prevent this, you have to use a different | ||
224 | editor. There is a firefox extension called "ViewSourceWith" | ||
225 | (https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/394) which allows you to | ||
226 | edit any text box in the editor of your choice. Configure it to launch | ||
227 | your favorite editor. When you want to send a patch, use this technique. | ||
228 | Once you have crafted your messsage + patch, save and exit the editor, | ||
229 | which should reload the Gmail edit box. GMAIL WILL PRESERVE THE TABS. | ||
230 | Hoorah. Apparently you can cut-n-paste literal tabs, but Gmail will | ||
231 | convert those to spaces upon sending! | ||
232 | |||
233 | The second problem is that Gmail converts tabs to spaces on replies. If | ||
234 | you reply to a patch, don't expect to be able to apply it as a patch. | ||
235 | |||
236 | The last problem is that Gmail will base64-encode any message that has a | ||
237 | non-ASCII character. That includes things like European names. Be aware. | ||
238 | |||
239 | Gmail is not convenient for lkml patches, but CAN be made to work. | ||
240 | |||
216 | ### | 241 | ### |
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index f5f812daf9f4..1a8af7354e79 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | |||
@@ -56,30 +56,6 @@ Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> | |||
56 | 56 | ||
57 | --------------------------- | 57 | --------------------------- |
58 | 58 | ||
59 | What: old tuner-3036 i2c driver | ||
60 | When: 2.6.28 | ||
61 | Why: This driver is for VERY old i2c-over-parallel port teletext receiver | ||
62 | boxes. Rather then spending effort on converting this driver to V4L2, | ||
63 | and since it is extremely unlikely that anyone still uses one of these | ||
64 | devices, it was decided to drop it. | ||
65 | Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> | ||
66 | Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> | ||
67 | |||
68 | --------------------------- | ||
69 | |||
70 | What: V4L2 dpc7146 driver | ||
71 | When: 2.6.28 | ||
72 | Why: Old driver for the dpc7146 demonstration board that is no longer | ||
73 | relevant. The last time this was tested on actual hardware was | ||
74 | probably around 2002. Since this is a driver for a demonstration | ||
75 | board the decision was made to remove it rather than spending a | ||
76 | lot of effort continually updating this driver to stay in sync | ||
77 | with the latest internal V4L2 or I2C API. | ||
78 | Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> | ||
79 | Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> | ||
80 | |||
81 | --------------------------- | ||
82 | |||
83 | What: PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl]) | 59 | What: PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl]) |
84 | When: November 2005 | 60 | When: November 2005 |
85 | Files: drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c | 61 | Files: drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c |
@@ -268,18 +244,6 @@ Who: Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de> | |||
268 | 244 | ||
269 | --------------------------- | 245 | --------------------------- |
270 | 246 | ||
271 | What: init_mm export | ||
272 | When: 2.6.26 | ||
273 | Why: Not used in-tree. The current out-of-tree users used it to | ||
274 | work around problems in the CPA code which should be resolved | ||
275 | by now. One usecase was described to provide verification code | ||
276 | of the CPA operation. That's a good idea in general, but such | ||
277 | code / infrastructure should be in the kernel and not in some | ||
278 | out-of-tree driver. | ||
279 | Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> | ||
280 | |||
281 | ---------------------------- | ||
282 | |||
283 | What: usedac i386 kernel parameter | 247 | What: usedac i386 kernel parameter |
284 | When: 2.6.27 | 248 | When: 2.6.27 |
285 | Why: replaced by allowdac and no dac combination | 249 | Why: replaced by allowdac and no dac combination |
@@ -359,3 +323,11 @@ Why: The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which | |||
359 | eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more | 323 | eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more |
360 | efficient in every way. | 324 | efficient in every way. |
361 | Who: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp> | 325 | Who: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp> |
326 | |||
327 | --------------------------- | ||
328 | |||
329 | What: i2c_attach_client(), i2c_detach_client(), i2c_driver->detach_client() | ||
330 | When: 2.6.29 (ideally) or 2.6.30 (more likely) | ||
331 | Why: Deprecated by the new (standard) device driver binding model. Use | ||
332 | i2c_driver->probe() and ->remove() instead. | ||
333 | Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 8362860e21a7..23d2f4460deb 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking | |||
@@ -161,8 +161,12 @@ prototypes: | |||
161 | int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page); | 161 | int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page); |
162 | int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping, | 162 | int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping, |
163 | struct list_head *pages, unsigned nr_pages); | 163 | struct list_head *pages, unsigned nr_pages); |
164 | int (*prepare_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned); | 164 | int (*write_begin)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping, |
165 | int (*commit_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned); | 165 | loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned flags, |
166 | struct page **pagep, void **fsdata); | ||
167 | int (*write_end)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping, | ||
168 | loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned copied, | ||
169 | struct page *page, void *fsdata); | ||
166 | sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); | 170 | sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); |
167 | int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); | 171 | int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); |
168 | int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); | 172 | int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); |
@@ -180,8 +184,6 @@ sync_page: no maybe | |||
180 | writepages: no | 184 | writepages: no |
181 | set_page_dirty no no | 185 | set_page_dirty no no |
182 | readpages: no | 186 | readpages: no |
183 | prepare_write: no yes yes | ||
184 | commit_write: no yes yes | ||
185 | write_begin: no locks the page yes | 187 | write_begin: no locks the page yes |
186 | write_end: no yes, unlocks yes | 188 | write_end: no yes, unlocks yes |
187 | perform_write: no n/a yes | 189 | perform_write: no n/a yes |
@@ -191,7 +193,7 @@ releasepage: no yes | |||
191 | direct_IO: no | 193 | direct_IO: no |
192 | launder_page: no yes | 194 | launder_page: no yes |
193 | 195 | ||
194 | ->prepare_write(), ->commit_write(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage() | 196 | ->write_begin(), ->write_end(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage() |
195 | may be called from the request handler (/dev/loop). | 197 | may be called from the request handler (/dev/loop). |
196 | 198 | ||
197 | ->readpage() unlocks the page, either synchronously or via I/O | 199 | ->readpage() unlocks the page, either synchronously or via I/O |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt index 4340cc825796..67310fbbb7df 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt | |||
@@ -28,10 +28,7 @@ Manish Singh <manish.singh@oracle.com> | |||
28 | Caveats | 28 | Caveats |
29 | ======= | 29 | ======= |
30 | Features which OCFS2 does not support yet: | 30 | Features which OCFS2 does not support yet: |
31 | - extended attributes | ||
32 | - quotas | 31 | - quotas |
33 | - cluster aware flock | ||
34 | - cluster aware lockf | ||
35 | - Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY) | 32 | - Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY) |
36 | - Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease) | 33 | - Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease) |
37 | - POSIX ACLs | 34 | - POSIX ACLs |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index bcceb99b81dd..71df353e367c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | |||
@@ -44,6 +44,7 @@ Table of Contents | |||
44 | 2.14 /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields | 44 | 2.14 /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields |
45 | 2.15 /proc/<pid>/coredump_filter - Core dump filtering settings | 45 | 2.15 /proc/<pid>/coredump_filter - Core dump filtering settings |
46 | 2.16 /proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts | 46 | 2.16 /proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts |
47 | 2.17 /proc/sys/fs/epoll - Configuration options for the epoll interface | ||
47 | 48 | ||
48 | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | 49 | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
49 | Preface | 50 | Preface |
@@ -1338,10 +1339,13 @@ nmi_watchdog | |||
1338 | 1339 | ||
1339 | Enables/Disables the NMI watchdog on x86 systems. When the value is non-zero | 1340 | Enables/Disables the NMI watchdog on x86 systems. When the value is non-zero |
1340 | the NMI watchdog is enabled and will continuously test all online cpus to | 1341 | the NMI watchdog is enabled and will continuously test all online cpus to |
1341 | determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. | 1342 | determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. Currently, |
1343 | passing "nmi_watchdog=" parameter at boot time is required for this function | ||
1344 | to work. | ||
1342 | 1345 | ||
1343 | Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI | 1346 | If LAPIC NMI watchdog method is in use (nmi_watchdog=2 kernel parameter), the |
1344 | watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize. | 1347 | NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile. By disabling the NMI watchdog, |
1348 | oprofile may have more registers to utilize. | ||
1345 | 1349 | ||
1346 | msgmni | 1350 | msgmni |
1347 | ------ | 1351 | ------ |
@@ -2483,4 +2487,30 @@ For more information on mount propagation see: | |||
2483 | 2487 | ||
2484 | Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt | 2488 | Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt |
2485 | 2489 | ||
2490 | 2.17 /proc/sys/fs/epoll - Configuration options for the epoll interface | ||
2491 | -------------------------------------------------------- | ||
2492 | |||
2493 | This directory contains configuration options for the epoll(7) interface. | ||
2494 | |||
2495 | max_user_instances | ||
2496 | ------------------ | ||
2497 | |||
2498 | This is the maximum number of epoll file descriptors that a single user can | ||
2499 | have open at a given time. The default value is 128, and should be enough | ||
2500 | for normal users. | ||
2501 | |||
2502 | max_user_watches | ||
2503 | ---------------- | ||
2504 | |||
2505 | Every epoll file descriptor can store a number of files to be monitored | ||
2506 | for event readiness. Each one of these monitored files constitutes a "watch". | ||
2507 | This configuration option sets the maximum number of "watches" that are | ||
2508 | allowed for each user. | ||
2509 | Each "watch" costs roughly 90 bytes on a 32bit kernel, and roughly 160 bytes | ||
2510 | on a 64bit one. | ||
2511 | The current default value for max_user_watches is the 1/32 of the available | ||
2512 | low memory, divided for the "watch" cost in bytes. | ||
2513 | |||
2514 | |||
2486 | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | 2515 | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
2516 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt index 62fe9b1e0890..a8273d5fad20 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt | |||
@@ -130,12 +130,12 @@ The 2.6 kernel build process always creates a gzipped cpio format initramfs | |||
130 | archive and links it into the resulting kernel binary. By default, this | 130 | archive and links it into the resulting kernel binary. By default, this |
131 | archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86). | 131 | archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86). |
132 | 132 | ||
133 | The config option CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (for some reason buried under | 133 | The config option CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (in General Setup in menuconfig, |
134 | devices->block devices in menuconfig, and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used | 134 | and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used to specify a source for the |
135 | to specify a source for the initramfs archive, which will automatically be | 135 | initramfs archive, which will automatically be incorporated into the |
136 | incorporated into the resulting binary. This option can point to an existing | 136 | resulting binary. This option can point to an existing gzipped cpio |
137 | gzipped cpio archive, a directory containing files to be archived, or a text | 137 | archive, a directory containing files to be archived, or a text file |
138 | file specification such as the following example: | 138 | specification such as the following example: |
139 | 139 | ||
140 | dir /dev 755 0 0 | 140 | dir /dev 755 0 0 |
141 | nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1 | 141 | nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1 |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt index bbac4f1d9056..3a5ddc96901a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt | |||
@@ -8,6 +8,12 @@ if you want to format from within Linux. | |||
8 | 8 | ||
9 | VFAT MOUNT OPTIONS | 9 | VFAT MOUNT OPTIONS |
10 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | 10 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
11 | uid=### -- Set the owner of all files on this filesystem. | ||
12 | The default is the uid of current process. | ||
13 | |||
14 | gid=### -- Set the group of all files on this filesystem. | ||
15 | The default is the gid of current process. | ||
16 | |||
11 | umask=### -- The permission mask (for files and directories, see umask(1)). | 17 | umask=### -- The permission mask (for files and directories, see umask(1)). |
12 | The default is the umask of current process. | 18 | The default is the umask of current process. |
13 | 19 | ||
@@ -36,7 +42,7 @@ codepage=### -- Sets the codepage number for converting to shortname | |||
36 | characters on FAT filesystem. | 42 | characters on FAT filesystem. |
37 | By default, FAT_DEFAULT_CODEPAGE setting is used. | 43 | By default, FAT_DEFAULT_CODEPAGE setting is used. |
38 | 44 | ||
39 | iocharset=name -- Character set to use for converting between the | 45 | iocharset=<name> -- Character set to use for converting between the |
40 | encoding is used for user visible filename and 16 bit | 46 | encoding is used for user visible filename and 16 bit |
41 | Unicode characters. Long filenames are stored on disk | 47 | Unicode characters. Long filenames are stored on disk |
42 | in Unicode format, but Unix for the most part doesn't | 48 | in Unicode format, but Unix for the most part doesn't |
@@ -86,6 +92,8 @@ check=s|r|n -- Case sensitivity checking setting. | |||
86 | r: relaxed, case insensitive | 92 | r: relaxed, case insensitive |
87 | n: normal, default setting, currently case insensitive | 93 | n: normal, default setting, currently case insensitive |
88 | 94 | ||
95 | nocase -- This was deprecated for vfat. Use shortname=win95 instead. | ||
96 | |||
89 | shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed | 97 | shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed |
90 | -- Shortname display/create setting. | 98 | -- Shortname display/create setting. |
91 | lower: convert to lowercase for display, | 99 | lower: convert to lowercase for display, |
@@ -99,11 +107,31 @@ shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed | |||
99 | tz=UTC -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time. | 107 | tz=UTC -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time. |
100 | This option disables the conversion of timestamps | 108 | This option disables the conversion of timestamps |
101 | between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC | 109 | between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC |
102 | (which Linux uses internally). This is particuluarly | 110 | (which Linux uses internally). This is particularly |
103 | useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras) | 111 | useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras) |
104 | that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of | 112 | that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of |
105 | local time. | 113 | local time. |
106 | 114 | ||
115 | showexec -- If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be | ||
116 | allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE, | ||
117 | .COM, or .BAT. Not set by default. | ||
118 | |||
119 | debug -- Can be set, but unused by the current implementation. | ||
120 | |||
121 | sys_immutable -- If set, ATTR_SYS attribute on FAT is handled as | ||
122 | IMMUTABLE flag on Linux. Not set by default. | ||
123 | |||
124 | flush -- If set, the filesystem will try to flush to disk more | ||
125 | early than normal. Not set by default. | ||
126 | |||
127 | rodir -- FAT has the ATTR_RO (read-only) attribute. But on Windows, | ||
128 | the ATTR_RO of the directory will be just ignored actually, | ||
129 | and is used by only applications as flag. E.g. it's setted | ||
130 | for the customized folder. | ||
131 | |||
132 | If you want to use ATTR_RO as read-only flag even for | ||
133 | the directory, set this option. | ||
134 | |||
107 | <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false | 135 | <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false |
108 | 136 | ||
109 | TODO | 137 | TODO |
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index c4d348dabe94..5579bda58a6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt | |||
@@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ written-back to storage typically in whole pages, however the | |||
492 | address_space has finer control of write sizes. | 492 | address_space has finer control of write sizes. |
493 | 493 | ||
494 | The read process essentially only requires 'readpage'. The write | 494 | The read process essentially only requires 'readpage'. The write |
495 | process is more complicated and uses prepare_write/commit_write or | 495 | process is more complicated and uses write_begin/write_end or |
496 | set_page_dirty to write data into the address_space, and writepage, | 496 | set_page_dirty to write data into the address_space, and writepage, |
497 | sync_page, and writepages to writeback data to storage. | 497 | sync_page, and writepages to writeback data to storage. |
498 | 498 | ||
@@ -521,8 +521,6 @@ struct address_space_operations { | |||
521 | int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page); | 521 | int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page); |
522 | int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping, | 522 | int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping, |
523 | struct list_head *pages, unsigned nr_pages); | 523 | struct list_head *pages, unsigned nr_pages); |
524 | int (*prepare_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned); | ||
525 | int (*commit_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned); | ||
526 | int (*write_begin)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping, | 524 | int (*write_begin)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping, |
527 | loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned flags, | 525 | loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned flags, |
528 | struct page **pagep, void **fsdata); | 526 | struct page **pagep, void **fsdata); |
@@ -598,37 +596,7 @@ struct address_space_operations { | |||
598 | readpages is only used for read-ahead, so read errors are | 596 | readpages is only used for read-ahead, so read errors are |
599 | ignored. If anything goes wrong, feel free to give up. | 597 | ignored. If anything goes wrong, feel free to give up. |
600 | 598 | ||
601 | prepare_write: called by the generic write path in VM to set up a write | 599 | write_begin: |
602 | request for a page. This indicates to the address space that | ||
603 | the given range of bytes is about to be written. The | ||
604 | address_space should check that the write will be able to | ||
605 | complete, by allocating space if necessary and doing any other | ||
606 | internal housekeeping. If the write will update parts of | ||
607 | any basic-blocks on storage, then those blocks should be | ||
608 | pre-read (if they haven't been read already) so that the | ||
609 | updated blocks can be written out properly. | ||
610 | The page will be locked. | ||
611 | |||
612 | Note: the page _must not_ be marked uptodate in this function | ||
613 | (or anywhere else) unless it actually is uptodate right now. As | ||
614 | soon as a page is marked uptodate, it is possible for a concurrent | ||
615 | read(2) to copy it to userspace. | ||
616 | |||
617 | commit_write: If prepare_write succeeds, new data will be copied | ||
618 | into the page and then commit_write will be called. It will | ||
619 | typically update the size of the file (if appropriate) and | ||
620 | mark the inode as dirty, and do any other related housekeeping | ||
621 | operations. It should avoid returning an error if possible - | ||
622 | errors should have been handled by prepare_write. | ||
623 | |||
624 | write_begin: This is intended as a replacement for prepare_write. The | ||
625 | key differences being that: | ||
626 | - it returns a locked page (in *pagep) rather than being | ||
627 | given a pre locked page; | ||
628 | - it must be able to cope with short writes (where the | ||
629 | length passed to write_begin is greater than the number | ||
630 | of bytes copied into the page). | ||
631 | |||
632 | Called by the generic buffered write code to ask the filesystem to | 600 | Called by the generic buffered write code to ask the filesystem to |
633 | prepare to write len bytes at the given offset in the file. The | 601 | prepare to write len bytes at the given offset in the file. The |
634 | address_space should check that the write will be able to complete, | 602 | address_space should check that the write will be able to complete, |
@@ -640,6 +608,9 @@ struct address_space_operations { | |||
640 | The filesystem must return the locked pagecache page for the specified | 608 | The filesystem must return the locked pagecache page for the specified |
641 | offset, in *pagep, for the caller to write into. | 609 | offset, in *pagep, for the caller to write into. |
642 | 610 | ||
611 | It must be able to cope with short writes (where the length passed to | ||
612 | write_begin is greater than the number of bytes copied into the page). | ||
613 | |||
643 | flags is a field for AOP_FLAG_xxx flags, described in | 614 | flags is a field for AOP_FLAG_xxx flags, described in |
644 | include/linux/fs.h. | 615 | include/linux/fs.h. |
645 | 616 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt index 3cc4010521a0..0466ee569278 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt | |||
@@ -39,10 +39,11 @@ The block device operation is optional, these block devices support it as of | |||
39 | today: | 39 | today: |
40 | - dcssblk: s390 dcss block device driver | 40 | - dcssblk: s390 dcss block device driver |
41 | 41 | ||
42 | An address space operation named get_xip_page is used to retrieve reference | 42 | An address space operation named get_xip_mem is used to retrieve references |
43 | to a struct page. To address the target page, a reference to an address_space, | 43 | to a page frame number and a kernel address. To obtain these values a reference |
44 | and a sector number is provided. A 3rd argument indicates whether the | 44 | to an address_space is provided. This function assigns values to the kmem and |
45 | function should allocate blocks if needed. | 45 | pfn parameters. The third argument indicates whether the function should allocate |
46 | blocks if needed. | ||
46 | 47 | ||
47 | This address space operation is mutually exclusive with readpage&writepage that | 48 | This address space operation is mutually exclusive with readpage&writepage that |
48 | do page cache read/write operations. | 49 | do page cache read/write operations. |
diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index d330fe3103da..9cc4d685dde5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt | |||
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Copyright 2008 Red Hat Inc. | |||
8 | Reviewers: Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton, | 8 | Reviewers: Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton, |
9 | John Kacur, and David Teigland. | 9 | John Kacur, and David Teigland. |
10 | 10 | ||
11 | Written for: 2.6.27-rc1 | 11 | Written for: 2.6.28-rc2 |
12 | 12 | ||
13 | Introduction | 13 | Introduction |
14 | ------------ | 14 | ------------ |
@@ -50,26 +50,26 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: | |||
50 | 50 | ||
51 | Note: all time values are in microseconds. | 51 | Note: all time values are in microseconds. |
52 | 52 | ||
53 | current_tracer : This is used to set or display the current tracer | 53 | current_tracer: This is used to set or display the current tracer |
54 | that is configured. | 54 | that is configured. |
55 | 55 | ||
56 | available_tracers : This holds the different types of tracers that | 56 | available_tracers: This holds the different types of tracers that |
57 | have been compiled into the kernel. The tracers | 57 | have been compiled into the kernel. The tracers |
58 | listed here can be configured by echoing their name | 58 | listed here can be configured by echoing their name |
59 | into current_tracer. | 59 | into current_tracer. |
60 | 60 | ||
61 | tracing_enabled : This sets or displays whether the current_tracer | 61 | tracing_enabled: This sets or displays whether the current_tracer |
62 | is activated and tracing or not. Echo 0 into this | 62 | is activated and tracing or not. Echo 0 into this |
63 | file to disable the tracer or 1 to enable it. | 63 | file to disable the tracer or 1 to enable it. |
64 | 64 | ||
65 | trace : This file holds the output of the trace in a human readable | 65 | trace: This file holds the output of the trace in a human readable |
66 | format (described below). | 66 | format (described below). |
67 | 67 | ||
68 | latency_trace : This file shows the same trace but the information | 68 | latency_trace: This file shows the same trace but the information |
69 | is organized more to display possible latencies | 69 | is organized more to display possible latencies |
70 | in the system (described below). | 70 | in the system (described below). |
71 | 71 | ||
72 | trace_pipe : The output is the same as the "trace" file but this | 72 | trace_pipe: The output is the same as the "trace" file but this |
73 | file is meant to be streamed with live tracing. | 73 | file is meant to be streamed with live tracing. |
74 | Reads from this file will block until new data | 74 | Reads from this file will block until new data |
75 | is retrieved. Unlike the "trace" and "latency_trace" | 75 | is retrieved. Unlike the "trace" and "latency_trace" |
@@ -82,11 +82,11 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: | |||
82 | tracer is not adding more data, they will display | 82 | tracer is not adding more data, they will display |
83 | the same information every time they are read. | 83 | the same information every time they are read. |
84 | 84 | ||
85 | iter_ctrl : This file lets the user control the amount of data | 85 | iter_ctrl: This file lets the user control the amount of data |
86 | that is displayed in one of the above output | 86 | that is displayed in one of the above output |
87 | files. | 87 | files. |
88 | 88 | ||
89 | trace_max_latency : Some of the tracers record the max latency. | 89 | trace_max_latency: Some of the tracers record the max latency. |
90 | For example, the time interrupts are disabled. | 90 | For example, the time interrupts are disabled. |
91 | This time is saved in this file. The max trace | 91 | This time is saved in this file. The max trace |
92 | will also be stored, and displayed by either | 92 | will also be stored, and displayed by either |
@@ -94,29 +94,26 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: | |||
94 | only be recorded if the latency is greater than | 94 | only be recorded if the latency is greater than |
95 | the value in this file. (in microseconds) | 95 | the value in this file. (in microseconds) |
96 | 96 | ||
97 | trace_entries : This sets or displays the number of trace | 97 | trace_entries: This sets or displays the number of bytes each CPU |
98 | entries each CPU buffer can hold. The tracer buffers | 98 | buffer can hold. The tracer buffers are the same size |
99 | are the same size for each CPU. The displayed number | 99 | for each CPU. The displayed number is the size of the |
100 | is the size of the CPU buffer and not total size. The | 100 | CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The |
101 | trace buffers are allocated in pages (blocks of memory | 101 | trace buffers are allocated in pages (blocks of memory |
102 | that the kernel uses for allocation, usually 4 KB in size). | 102 | that the kernel uses for allocation, usually 4 KB in size). |
103 | Since each entry is smaller than a page, if the last | 103 | If the last page allocated has room for more bytes |
104 | allocated page has room for more entries than were | 104 | than requested, the rest of the page will be used, |
105 | requested, the rest of the page is used to allocate | 105 | making the actual allocation bigger than requested. |
106 | entries. | 106 | (Note, the size may not be a multiple of the page size due |
107 | to buffer managment overhead.) | ||
107 | 108 | ||
108 | This can only be updated when the current_tracer | 109 | This can only be updated when the current_tracer |
109 | is set to "none". | 110 | is set to "nop". |
110 | 111 | ||
111 | NOTE: It is planned on changing the allocated buffers | 112 | tracing_cpumask: This is a mask that lets the user only trace |
112 | from being the number of possible CPUS to | ||
113 | the number of online CPUS. | ||
114 | |||
115 | tracing_cpumask : This is a mask that lets the user only trace | ||
116 | on specified CPUS. The format is a hex string | 113 | on specified CPUS. The format is a hex string |
117 | representing the CPUS. | 114 | representing the CPUS. |
118 | 115 | ||
119 | set_ftrace_filter : When dynamic ftrace is configured in (see the | 116 | set_ftrace_filter: When dynamic ftrace is configured in (see the |
120 | section below "dynamic ftrace"), the code is dynamically | 117 | section below "dynamic ftrace"), the code is dynamically |
121 | modified (code text rewrite) to disable calling of the | 118 | modified (code text rewrite) to disable calling of the |
122 | function profiler (mcount). This lets tracing be configured | 119 | function profiler (mcount). This lets tracing be configured |
@@ -130,14 +127,11 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: | |||
130 | be traced. If a function exists in both set_ftrace_filter | 127 | be traced. If a function exists in both set_ftrace_filter |
131 | and set_ftrace_notrace, the function will _not_ be traced. | 128 | and set_ftrace_notrace, the function will _not_ be traced. |
132 | 129 | ||
133 | available_filter_functions : When a function is encountered the first | 130 | available_filter_functions: This lists the functions that ftrace |
134 | time by the dynamic tracer, it is recorded and | 131 | has processed and can trace. These are the function |
135 | later the call is converted into a nop. This file | 132 | names that you can pass to "set_ftrace_filter" or |
136 | lists the functions that have been recorded | 133 | "set_ftrace_notrace". (See the section "dynamic ftrace" |
137 | by the dynamic tracer and these functions can | 134 | below for more details.) |
138 | be used to set the ftrace filter by the above | ||
139 | "set_ftrace_filter" file. (See the section "dynamic ftrace" | ||
140 | below for more details). | ||
141 | 135 | ||
142 | 136 | ||
143 | The Tracers | 137 | The Tracers |
@@ -145,7 +139,7 @@ The Tracers | |||
145 | 139 | ||
146 | Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured. | 140 | Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured. |
147 | 141 | ||
148 | ftrace - function tracer that uses mcount to trace all functions. | 142 | function - function tracer that uses mcount to trace all functions. |
149 | 143 | ||
150 | sched_switch - traces the context switches between tasks. | 144 | sched_switch - traces the context switches between tasks. |
151 | 145 | ||
@@ -166,8 +160,8 @@ Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured. | |||
166 | the highest priority task to get scheduled after | 160 | the highest priority task to get scheduled after |
167 | it has been woken up. | 161 | it has been woken up. |
168 | 162 | ||
169 | none - This is not a tracer. To remove all tracers from tracing | 163 | nop - This is not a tracer. To remove all tracers from tracing |
170 | simply echo "none" into current_tracer. | 164 | simply echo "nop" into current_tracer. |
171 | 165 | ||
172 | 166 | ||
173 | Examples of using the tracer | 167 | Examples of using the tracer |
@@ -182,7 +176,7 @@ Output format: | |||
182 | Here is an example of the output format of the file "trace" | 176 | Here is an example of the output format of the file "trace" |
183 | 177 | ||
184 | -------- | 178 | -------- |
185 | # tracer: ftrace | 179 | # tracer: function |
186 | # | 180 | # |
187 | # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION | 181 | # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION |
188 | # | | | | | | 182 | # | | | | | |
@@ -192,7 +186,7 @@ Here is an example of the output format of the file "trace" | |||
192 | -------- | 186 | -------- |
193 | 187 | ||
194 | A header is printed with the tracer name that is represented by the trace. | 188 | A header is printed with the tracer name that is represented by the trace. |
195 | In this case the tracer is "ftrace". Then a header showing the format. Task | 189 | In this case the tracer is "function". Then a header showing the format. Task |
196 | name "bash", the task PID "4251", the CPU that it was running on | 190 | name "bash", the task PID "4251", the CPU that it was running on |
197 | "01", the timestamp in <secs>.<usecs> format, the function name that was | 191 | "01", the timestamp in <secs>.<usecs> format, the function name that was |
198 | traced "path_put" and the parent function that called this function | 192 | traced "path_put" and the parent function that called this function |
@@ -291,6 +285,9 @@ explains which is which. | |||
291 | CPU#: The CPU which the process was running on. | 285 | CPU#: The CPU which the process was running on. |
292 | 286 | ||
293 | irqs-off: 'd' interrupts are disabled. '.' otherwise. | 287 | irqs-off: 'd' interrupts are disabled. '.' otherwise. |
288 | Note: If the architecture does not support a way to | ||
289 | read the irq flags variable, an 'X' will always | ||
290 | be printed here. | ||
294 | 291 | ||
295 | need-resched: 'N' task need_resched is set, '.' otherwise. | 292 | need-resched: 'N' task need_resched is set, '.' otherwise. |
296 | 293 | ||
@@ -1000,22 +997,20 @@ is the stack for the hard interrupt. This hides the fact that NEED_RESCHED | |||
1000 | has been set. We do not see the 'N' until we switch back to the task's | 997 | has been set. We do not see the 'N' until we switch back to the task's |
1001 | assigned stack. | 998 | assigned stack. |
1002 | 999 | ||
1003 | ftrace | 1000 | function |
1004 | ------ | 1001 | -------- |
1005 | 1002 | ||
1006 | ftrace is not only the name of the tracing infrastructure, but it | 1003 | This tracer is the function tracer. Enabling the function tracer |
1007 | is also a name of one of the tracers. The tracer is the function | 1004 | can be done from the debug file system. Make sure the ftrace_enabled is |
1008 | tracer. Enabling the function tracer can be done from the | 1005 | set; otherwise this tracer is a nop. |
1009 | debug file system. Make sure the ftrace_enabled is set otherwise | ||
1010 | this tracer is a nop. | ||
1011 | 1006 | ||
1012 | # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1 | 1007 | # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1 |
1013 | # echo ftrace > /debug/tracing/current_tracer | 1008 | # echo function > /debug/tracing/current_tracer |
1014 | # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled | 1009 | # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled |
1015 | # usleep 1 | 1010 | # usleep 1 |
1016 | # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled | 1011 | # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled |
1017 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace | 1012 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace |
1018 | # tracer: ftrace | 1013 | # tracer: function |
1019 | # | 1014 | # |
1020 | # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION | 1015 | # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION |
1021 | # | | | | | | 1016 | # | | | | | |
@@ -1037,10 +1032,10 @@ this tracer is a nop. | |||
1037 | [...] | 1032 | [...] |
1038 | 1033 | ||
1039 | 1034 | ||
1040 | Note: ftrace uses ring buffers to store the above entries. The newest data | 1035 | Note: function tracer uses ring buffers to store the above entries. |
1041 | may overwrite the oldest data. Sometimes using echo to stop the trace | 1036 | The newest data may overwrite the oldest data. Sometimes using echo to |
1042 | is not sufficient because the tracing could have overwritten the data | 1037 | stop the trace is not sufficient because the tracing could have overwritten |
1043 | that you wanted to record. For this reason, it is sometimes better to | 1038 | the data that you wanted to record. For this reason, it is sometimes better to |
1044 | disable tracing directly from a program. This allows you to stop the | 1039 | disable tracing directly from a program. This allows you to stop the |
1045 | tracing at the point that you hit the part that you are interested in. | 1040 | tracing at the point that you hit the part that you are interested in. |
1046 | To disable the tracing directly from a C program, something like following | 1041 | To disable the tracing directly from a C program, something like following |
@@ -1074,18 +1069,31 @@ every kernel function, produced by the -pg switch in gcc), starts | |||
1074 | of pointing to a simple return. (Enabling FTRACE will include the | 1069 | of pointing to a simple return. (Enabling FTRACE will include the |
1075 | -pg switch in the compiling of the kernel.) | 1070 | -pg switch in the compiling of the kernel.) |
1076 | 1071 | ||
1077 | When dynamic ftrace is initialized, it calls kstop_machine to make | 1072 | At compile time every C file object is run through the |
1078 | the machine act like a uniprocessor so that it can freely modify code | 1073 | recordmcount.pl script (located in the scripts directory). This |
1079 | without worrying about other processors executing that same code. At | 1074 | script will process the C object using objdump to find all the |
1080 | initialization, the mcount calls are changed to call a "record_ip" | 1075 | locations in the .text section that call mcount. (Note, only |
1081 | function. After this, the first time a kernel function is called, | 1076 | the .text section is processed, since processing other sections |
1082 | it has the calling address saved in a hash table. | 1077 | like .init.text may cause races due to those sections being freed). |
1083 | 1078 | ||
1084 | Later on the ftraced kernel thread is awoken and will again call | 1079 | A new section called "__mcount_loc" is created that holds references |
1085 | kstop_machine if new functions have been recorded. The ftraced thread | 1080 | to all the mcount call sites in the .text section. This section is |
1086 | will change all calls to mcount to "nop". Just calling mcount | 1081 | compiled back into the original object. The final linker will add |
1087 | and having mcount return has shown a 10% overhead. By converting | 1082 | all these references into a single table. |
1088 | it to a nop, there is no measurable overhead to the system. | 1083 | |
1084 | On boot up, before SMP is initialized, the dynamic ftrace code | ||
1085 | scans this table and updates all the locations into nops. It also | ||
1086 | records the locations, which are added to the available_filter_functions | ||
1087 | list. Modules are processed as they are loaded and before they are | ||
1088 | executed. When a module is unloaded, it also removes its functions from | ||
1089 | the ftrace function list. This is automatic in the module unload | ||
1090 | code, and the module author does not need to worry about it. | ||
1091 | |||
1092 | When tracing is enabled, kstop_machine is called to prevent races | ||
1093 | with the CPUS executing code being modified (which can cause the | ||
1094 | CPU to do undesireable things), and the nops are patched back | ||
1095 | to calls. But this time, they do not call mcount (which is just | ||
1096 | a function stub). They now call into the ftrace infrastructure. | ||
1089 | 1097 | ||
1090 | One special side-effect to the recording of the functions being | 1098 | One special side-effect to the recording of the functions being |
1091 | traced is that we can now selectively choose which functions we | 1099 | traced is that we can now selectively choose which functions we |
@@ -1248,36 +1256,6 @@ Produces: | |||
1248 | 1256 | ||
1249 | We can see that there's no more lock or preempt tracing. | 1257 | We can see that there's no more lock or preempt tracing. |
1250 | 1258 | ||
1251 | ftraced | ||
1252 | ------- | ||
1253 | |||
1254 | As mentioned above, when dynamic ftrace is configured in, a kernel | ||
1255 | thread wakes up once a second and checks to see if there are mcount | ||
1256 | calls that need to be converted into nops. If there are not any, then | ||
1257 | it simply goes back to sleep. But if there are some, it will call | ||
1258 | kstop_machine to convert the calls to nops. | ||
1259 | |||
1260 | There may be a case in which you do not want this added latency. | ||
1261 | Perhaps you are doing some audio recording and this activity might | ||
1262 | cause skips in the playback. There is an interface to disable | ||
1263 | and enable the "ftraced" kernel thread. | ||
1264 | |||
1265 | # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/ftraced_enabled | ||
1266 | |||
1267 | This will disable the calling of kstop_machine to update the | ||
1268 | mcount calls to nops. Remember that there is a large overhead | ||
1269 | to calling mcount. Without this kernel thread, that overhead will | ||
1270 | exist. | ||
1271 | |||
1272 | If there are recorded calls to mcount, any write to the ftraced_enabled | ||
1273 | file will cause the kstop_machine to run. This means that a | ||
1274 | user can manually perform the updates when they want to by simply | ||
1275 | echoing a '0' into the ftraced_enabled file. | ||
1276 | |||
1277 | The updates are also done at the beginning of enabling a tracer | ||
1278 | that uses ftrace function recording. | ||
1279 | |||
1280 | |||
1281 | trace_pipe | 1259 | trace_pipe |
1282 | ---------- | 1260 | ---------- |
1283 | 1261 | ||
@@ -1286,14 +1264,14 @@ on the tracing is different. Every read from trace_pipe is consumed. | |||
1286 | This means that subsequent reads will be different. The trace | 1264 | This means that subsequent reads will be different. The trace |
1287 | is live. | 1265 | is live. |
1288 | 1266 | ||
1289 | # echo ftrace > /debug/tracing/current_tracer | 1267 | # echo function > /debug/tracing/current_tracer |
1290 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace_pipe > /tmp/trace.out & | 1268 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace_pipe > /tmp/trace.out & |
1291 | [1] 4153 | 1269 | [1] 4153 |
1292 | # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled | 1270 | # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled |
1293 | # usleep 1 | 1271 | # usleep 1 |
1294 | # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled | 1272 | # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled |
1295 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace | 1273 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace |
1296 | # tracer: ftrace | 1274 | # tracer: function |
1297 | # | 1275 | # |
1298 | # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION | 1276 | # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION |
1299 | # | | | | | | 1277 | # | | | | | |
@@ -1314,7 +1292,7 @@ is live. | |||
1314 | 1292 | ||
1315 | Note, reading the trace_pipe file will block until more input is added. | 1293 | Note, reading the trace_pipe file will block until more input is added. |
1316 | By changing the tracer, trace_pipe will issue an EOF. We needed | 1294 | By changing the tracer, trace_pipe will issue an EOF. We needed |
1317 | to set the ftrace tracer _before_ cating the trace_pipe file. | 1295 | to set the function tracer _before_ we "cat" the trace_pipe file. |
1318 | 1296 | ||
1319 | 1297 | ||
1320 | trace entries | 1298 | trace entries |
@@ -1331,10 +1309,10 @@ number of entries. | |||
1331 | 65620 | 1309 | 65620 |
1332 | 1310 | ||
1333 | Note, to modify this, you must have tracing completely disabled. To do that, | 1311 | Note, to modify this, you must have tracing completely disabled. To do that, |
1334 | echo "none" into the current_tracer. If the current_tracer is not set | 1312 | echo "nop" into the current_tracer. If the current_tracer is not set |
1335 | to "none", an EINVAL error will be returned. | 1313 | to "nop", an EINVAL error will be returned. |
1336 | 1314 | ||
1337 | # echo none > /debug/tracing/current_tracer | 1315 | # echo nop > /debug/tracing/current_tracer |
1338 | # echo 100000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries | 1316 | # echo 100000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries |
1339 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries | 1317 | # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries |
1340 | 100045 | 1318 | 100045 |
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7462 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7462 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ec660b328275 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7462 | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ | |||
1 | Kernel driver adt7462 | ||
2 | ====================== | ||
3 | |||
4 | Supported chips: | ||
5 | * Analog Devices ADT7462 | ||
6 | Prefix: 'adt7462' | ||
7 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x58, 0x5C | ||
8 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website | ||
9 | |||
10 | Author: Darrick J. Wong | ||
11 | |||
12 | Description | ||
13 | ----------- | ||
14 | |||
15 | This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7462 chip family. | ||
16 | |||
17 | This chip is a bit of a beast. It has 8 counters for measuring fan speed. It | ||
18 | can also measure 13 voltages or 4 temperatures, or various combinations of the | ||
19 | two. See the chip documentation for more details about the exact set of | ||
20 | configurations. This driver does not allow one to configure the chip; that is | ||
21 | left to the system designer. | ||
22 | |||
23 | A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the ADT7462 | ||
24 | that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the three | ||
25 | temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and | ||
26 | programmable. Once configured, the ADT7462 will adjust the PWM outputs in | ||
27 | response to the measured temperatures without further host intervention. This | ||
28 | feature can also be disabled for manual control of the PWM's. | ||
29 | |||
30 | Each of the measured inputs (voltage, temperature, fan speed) has | ||
31 | corresponding high/low limit values. The ADT7462 will signal an ALARM if | ||
32 | any measured value exceeds either limit. | ||
33 | |||
34 | The ADT7462 samples all inputs continuously. The driver will not read | ||
35 | the registers more often than once every other second. Further, | ||
36 | configuration data is only read once per minute. | ||
37 | |||
38 | Special Features | ||
39 | ---------------- | ||
40 | |||
41 | The ADT7462 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore measure temperatures | ||
42 | with 0.25 degC resolution. | ||
43 | |||
44 | The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for | ||
45 | determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control. | ||
46 | |||
47 | The driver will report sensor labels when it is able to determine that | ||
48 | information from the configuration registers. | ||
49 | |||
50 | Configuration Notes | ||
51 | ------------------- | ||
52 | |||
53 | Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following: | ||
54 | |||
55 | * PWM Control | ||
56 | |||
57 | * pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and temp#_auto_point1_temp and | ||
58 | * pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and temp#_auto_point2_temp - | ||
59 | |||
60 | point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound. | ||
61 | point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound. | ||
62 | |||
63 | The ADT7462 will scale the pwm between the lower and higher pwm speed when | ||
64 | the temperature is between the two temperature boundaries. PWM values range | ||
65 | from 0 (off) to 255 (full speed). Fan speed will be set to maximum when the | ||
66 | temperature sensor associated with the PWM control exceeds temp#_max. | ||
67 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d b/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..65dfb0c0fd67 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ | |||
1 | Kernel driver lis3lv02d | ||
2 | ================== | ||
3 | |||
4 | Supported chips: | ||
5 | |||
6 | * STMicroelectronics LIS3LV02DL and LIS3LV02DQ | ||
7 | |||
8 | Author: | ||
9 | Yan Burman <burman.yan@gmail.com> | ||
10 | Eric Piel <eric.piel@tremplin-utc.net> | ||
11 | |||
12 | |||
13 | Description | ||
14 | ----------- | ||
15 | |||
16 | This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP laptops | ||
17 | sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data Protection System 3D" or | ||
18 | "HP 3D DriveGuard". It detect automatically laptops with this sensor. Known models | ||
19 | (for now the HP 2133, nc6420, nc2510, nc8510, nc84x0, nw9440 and nx9420) will | ||
20 | have their axis automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly | ||
21 | play neverball). The accelerometer data is readable via | ||
22 | /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d. | ||
23 | |||
24 | Sysfs attributes under /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/: | ||
25 | position - 3D position that the accelerometer reports. Format: "(x,y,z)" | ||
26 | calibrate - read: values (x, y, z) that are used as the base for input class device operation. | ||
27 | write: forces the base to be recalibrated with the current position. | ||
28 | rate - reports the sampling rate of the accelerometer device in HZ | ||
29 | |||
30 | This driver also provides an absolute input class device, allowing | ||
31 | the laptop to act as a pinball machine-esque joystick. | ||
32 | |||
33 | Axes orientation | ||
34 | ---------------- | ||
35 | |||
36 | For better compatibility between the various laptops. The values reported by | ||
37 | the accelerometer are converted into a "standard" organisation of the axes | ||
38 | (aka "can play neverball out of the box"): | ||
39 | * When the laptop is horizontal the position reported is about 0 for X and Y | ||
40 | and a positive value for Z | ||
41 | * If the left side is elevated, X increases (becomes positive) | ||
42 | * If the front side (where the touchpad is) is elevated, Y decreases (becomes negative) | ||
43 | * If the laptop is put upside-down, Z becomes negative | ||
44 | |||
45 | If your laptop model is not recognized (cf "dmesg"), you can send an email to the | ||
46 | authors to add it to the database. When reporting a new laptop, please include | ||
47 | the output of "dmidecode" plus the value of /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/position | ||
48 | in these four cases. | ||
49 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index e0d5206d1de3..0e8411710238 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 | |||
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Supported chips: | |||
8 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website | 8 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website |
9 | http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM90.html | 9 | http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM90.html |
10 | * National Semiconductor LM89 | 10 | * National Semiconductor LM89 |
11 | Prefix: 'lm99' | 11 | Prefix: 'lm89' (no auto-detection) |
12 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d | 12 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d |
13 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website | 13 | Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website |
14 | http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM89.html | 14 | http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM89.html |
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index c31e0291e167..81c0c59a60ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 | |||
@@ -13,8 +13,9 @@ Supported adapters: | |||
13 | * Intel 631xESB/632xESB (ESB2) | 13 | * Intel 631xESB/632xESB (ESB2) |
14 | * Intel 82801H (ICH8) | 14 | * Intel 82801H (ICH8) |
15 | * Intel 82801I (ICH9) | 15 | * Intel 82801I (ICH9) |
16 | * Intel Tolapai | 16 | * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai) |
17 | * Intel ICH10 | 17 | * Intel 82801JI (ICH10) |
18 | * Intel PCH | ||
18 | Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website | 19 | Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website |
19 | 20 | ||
20 | Authors: | 21 | Authors: |
@@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ Description | |||
32 | ----------- | 33 | ----------- |
33 | 34 | ||
34 | The ICH (properly known as the 82801AA), ICH0 (82801AB), ICH2 (82801BA), | 35 | The ICH (properly known as the 82801AA), ICH0 (82801AB), ICH2 (82801BA), |
35 | ICH3 (82801CA/CAM) and later devices are Intel chips that are a part of | 36 | ICH3 (82801CA/CAM) and later devices (PCH) are Intel chips that are a part of |
36 | Intel's '810' chipset for Celeron-based PCs, '810E' chipset for | 37 | Intel's '810' chipset for Celeron-based PCs, '810E' chipset for |
37 | Pentium-based PCs, '815E' chipset, and others. | 38 | Pentium-based PCs, '815E' chipset, and others. |
38 | 39 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x index 266481fd26e2..70e6a0cc1e15 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x | |||
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ I suspect that this driver could be made to work for the following SiS | |||
42 | chipsets as well: 635, and 635T. If anyone owns a board with those chips | 42 | chipsets as well: 635, and 635T. If anyone owns a board with those chips |
43 | AND is willing to risk crashing & burning an otherwise well-behaved kernel | 43 | AND is willing to risk crashing & burning an otherwise well-behaved kernel |
44 | in the name of progress... please contact me at <mhoffman@lightlink.com> or | 44 | in the name of progress... please contact me at <mhoffman@lightlink.com> or |
45 | via the project's mailing list: <i2c@lm-sensors.org>. Please send bug | 45 | via the linux-i2c mailing list: <linux-i2c@vger.kernel.org>. Please send bug |
46 | reports and/or success stories as well. | 46 | reports and/or success stories as well. |
47 | 47 | ||
48 | 48 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients b/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients deleted file mode 100644 index 7bf82c08f6ca..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients +++ /dev/null | |||
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ | |||
1 | Revision 7, 2007-04-19 | ||
2 | Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> | ||
3 | Greg KH <greg@kroah.com> | ||
4 | |||
5 | This is a guide on how to convert I2C chip drivers from Linux 2.4 to | ||
6 | Linux 2.6. I have been using existing drivers (lm75, lm78) as examples. | ||
7 | Then I converted a driver myself (lm83) and updated this document. | ||
8 | Note that this guide is strongly oriented towards hardware monitoring | ||
9 | drivers. Many points are still valid for other type of drivers, but | ||
10 | others may be irrelevant. | ||
11 | |||
12 | There are two sets of points below. The first set concerns technical | ||
13 | changes. The second set concerns coding policy. Both are mandatory. | ||
14 | |||
15 | Although reading this guide will help you porting drivers, I suggest | ||
16 | you keep an eye on an already ported driver while porting your own | ||
17 | driver. This will help you a lot understanding what this guide | ||
18 | exactly means. Choose the chip driver that is the more similar to | ||
19 | yours for best results. | ||
20 | |||
21 | Technical changes: | ||
22 | |||
23 | * [Driver type] Any driver that was relying on i2c-isa has to be | ||
24 | converted to a proper isa, platform or pci driver. This is not | ||
25 | covered by this guide. | ||
26 | |||
27 | * [Includes] Get rid of "version.h" and <linux/i2c-proc.h>. | ||
28 | Includes typically look like that: | ||
29 | #include <linux/module.h> | ||
30 | #include <linux/init.h> | ||
31 | #include <linux/slab.h> | ||
32 | #include <linux/jiffies.h> | ||
33 | #include <linux/i2c.h> | ||
34 | #include <linux/hwmon.h> /* for hardware monitoring drivers */ | ||
35 | #include <linux/hwmon-sysfs.h> | ||
36 | #include <linux/hwmon-vid.h> /* if you need VRM support */ | ||
37 | #include <linux/err.h> /* for class registration */ | ||
38 | Please respect this inclusion order. Some extra headers may be | ||
39 | required for a given driver (e.g. "lm75.h"). | ||
40 | |||
41 | * [Addresses] SENSORS_I2C_END becomes I2C_CLIENT_END, ISA addresses | ||
42 | are no more handled by the i2c core. Address ranges are no more | ||
43 | supported either, define each individual address separately. | ||
44 | SENSORS_INSMOD_<n> becomes I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD_<n>. | ||
45 | |||
46 | * [Client data] Get rid of sysctl_id. Try using standard names for | ||
47 | register values (for example, temp_os becomes temp_max). You're | ||
48 | still relatively free here, but you *have* to follow the standard | ||
49 | names for sysfs files (see the Sysctl section below). | ||
50 | |||
51 | * [Function prototypes] The detect functions loses its flags | ||
52 | parameter. Sysctl (e.g. lm75_temp) and miscellaneous functions | ||
53 | are off the list of prototypes. This usually leaves five | ||
54 | prototypes: | ||
55 | static int lm75_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adapter); | ||
56 | static int lm75_detect(struct i2c_adapter *adapter, int address, | ||
57 | int kind); | ||
58 | static void lm75_init_client(struct i2c_client *client); | ||
59 | static int lm75_detach_client(struct i2c_client *client); | ||
60 | static struct lm75_data lm75_update_device(struct device *dev); | ||
61 | |||
62 | * [Sysctl] All sysctl stuff is of course gone (defines, ctl_table | ||
63 | and functions). Instead, you have to define show and set functions for | ||
64 | each sysfs file. Only define set for writable values. Take a look at an | ||
65 | existing 2.6 driver for details (it87 for example). Don't forget | ||
66 | to define the attributes for each file (this is that step that | ||
67 | links callback functions). Use the file names specified in | ||
68 | Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface for the individual files. Also | ||
69 | convert the units these files read and write to the specified ones. | ||
70 | If you need to add a new type of file, please discuss it on the | ||
71 | sensors mailing list <lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org> by providing a | ||
72 | patch to the Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface file. | ||
73 | |||
74 | * [Attach] The attach function should make sure that the adapter's | ||
75 | class has I2C_CLASS_HWMON (or whatever class is suitable for your | ||
76 | driver), using the following construct: | ||
77 | if (!(adapter->class & I2C_CLASS_HWMON)) | ||
78 | return 0; | ||
79 | Call i2c_probe() instead of i2c_detect(). | ||
80 | |||
81 | * [Detect] As mentioned earlier, the flags parameter is gone. | ||
82 | The type_name and client_name strings are replaced by a single | ||
83 | name string, which will be filled with a lowercase, short string. | ||
84 | The labels used for error paths are reduced to the number needed. | ||
85 | It is advised that the labels are given descriptive names such as | ||
86 | exit and exit_free. Don't forget to properly set err before | ||
87 | jumping to error labels. By the way, labels should be left-aligned. | ||
88 | Use kzalloc instead of kmalloc. | ||
89 | Use i2c_set_clientdata to set the client data (as opposed to | ||
90 | a direct access to client->data). | ||
91 | Use strlcpy instead of strcpy or snprintf to copy the client name. | ||
92 | Replace the sysctl directory registration by calls to | ||
93 | device_create_file. Move the driver initialization before any | ||
94 | sysfs file creation. | ||
95 | Register the client with the hwmon class (using hwmon_device_register) | ||
96 | if applicable. | ||
97 | Drop client->id. | ||
98 | Drop any 24RF08 corruption prevention you find, as this is now done | ||
99 | at the i2c-core level, and doing it twice voids it. | ||
100 | Don't add I2C_CLIENT_ALLOW_USE to client->flags, it's the default now. | ||
101 | |||
102 | * [Init] Limits must not be set by the driver (can be done later in | ||
103 | user-space). Chip should not be reset default (although a module | ||
104 | parameter may be used to force it), and initialization should be | ||
105 | limited to the strictly necessary steps. | ||
106 | |||
107 | * [Detach] Remove the call to i2c_deregister_entry. Do not log an | ||
108 | error message if i2c_detach_client fails, as i2c-core will now do | ||
109 | it for you. | ||
110 | Unregister from the hwmon class if applicable. | ||
111 | |||
112 | * [Update] The function prototype changed, it is now | ||
113 | passed a device structure, which you have to convert to a client | ||
114 | using to_i2c_client(dev). The update function should return a | ||
115 | pointer to the client data. | ||
116 | Don't access client->data directly, use i2c_get_clientdata(client) | ||
117 | instead. | ||
118 | Use time_after() instead of direct jiffies comparison. | ||
119 | |||
120 | * [Interface] Make sure there is a MODULE_LICENSE() line, at the bottom | ||
121 | of the file (after MODULE_AUTHOR() and MODULE_DESCRIPTION(), in this | ||
122 | order). | ||
123 | |||
124 | * [Driver] The flags field of the i2c_driver structure is gone. | ||
125 | I2C_DF_NOTIFY is now the default behavior. | ||
126 | The i2c_driver structure has a driver member, which is itself a | ||
127 | structure, those name member should be initialized to a driver name | ||
128 | string. i2c_driver itself has no name member anymore. | ||
129 | |||
130 | * [Driver model] Instead of shutdown or reboot notifiers, provide a | ||
131 | shutdown() method in your driver. | ||
132 | |||
133 | * [Power management] Use the driver model suspend() and resume() | ||
134 | callbacks instead of the obsolete pm_register() calls. | ||
135 | |||
136 | Coding policy: | ||
137 | |||
138 | * [Copyright] Use (C), not (c), for copyright. | ||
139 | |||
140 | * [Debug/log] Get rid of #ifdef DEBUG/#endif constructs whenever you | ||
141 | can. Calls to printk for debugging purposes are replaced by calls to | ||
142 | dev_dbg where possible, else to pr_debug. Here is an example of how | ||
143 | to call it (taken from lm75_detect): | ||
144 | dev_dbg(&client->dev, "Starting lm75 update\n"); | ||
145 | Replace other printk calls with the dev_info, dev_err or dev_warn | ||
146 | function, as appropriate. | ||
147 | |||
148 | * [Constants] Constants defines (registers, conversions) should be | ||
149 | aligned. This greatly improves readability. | ||
150 | Alignments are achieved by the means of tabs, not spaces. Remember | ||
151 | that tabs are set to 8 in the Linux kernel code. | ||
152 | |||
153 | * [Layout] Avoid extra empty lines between comments and what they | ||
154 | comment. Respect the coding style (see Documentation/CodingStyle), | ||
155 | in particular when it comes to placing curly braces. | ||
156 | |||
157 | * [Comments] Make sure that no comment refers to a file that isn't | ||
158 | part of the Linux source tree (typically doc/chips/<chip name>), | ||
159 | and that remaining comments still match the code. Merging comment | ||
160 | lines when possible is encouraged. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients index d73ee117a8ca..6b9af7d479c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients | |||
@@ -10,23 +10,21 @@ General remarks | |||
10 | =============== | 10 | =============== |
11 | 11 | ||
12 | Try to keep the kernel namespace as clean as possible. The best way to | 12 | Try to keep the kernel namespace as clean as possible. The best way to |
13 | do this is to use a unique prefix for all global symbols. This is | 13 | do this is to use a unique prefix for all global symbols. This is |
14 | especially important for exported symbols, but it is a good idea to do | 14 | especially important for exported symbols, but it is a good idea to do |
15 | it for non-exported symbols too. We will use the prefix `foo_' in this | 15 | it for non-exported symbols too. We will use the prefix `foo_' in this |
16 | tutorial, and `FOO_' for preprocessor variables. | 16 | tutorial. |
17 | 17 | ||
18 | 18 | ||
19 | The driver structure | 19 | The driver structure |
20 | ==================== | 20 | ==================== |
21 | 21 | ||
22 | Usually, you will implement a single driver structure, and instantiate | 22 | Usually, you will implement a single driver structure, and instantiate |
23 | all clients from it. Remember, a driver structure contains general access | 23 | all clients from it. Remember, a driver structure contains general access |
24 | routines, and should be zero-initialized except for fields with data you | 24 | routines, and should be zero-initialized except for fields with data you |
25 | provide. A client structure holds device-specific information like the | 25 | provide. A client structure holds device-specific information like the |
26 | driver model device node, and its I2C address. | 26 | driver model device node, and its I2C address. |
27 | 27 | ||
28 | /* iff driver uses driver model ("new style") binding model: */ | ||
29 | |||
30 | static struct i2c_device_id foo_idtable[] = { | 28 | static struct i2c_device_id foo_idtable[] = { |
31 | { "foo", my_id_for_foo }, | 29 | { "foo", my_id_for_foo }, |
32 | { "bar", my_id_for_bar }, | 30 | { "bar", my_id_for_bar }, |
@@ -40,7 +38,6 @@ static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = { | |||
40 | .name = "foo", | 38 | .name = "foo", |
41 | }, | 39 | }, |
42 | 40 | ||
43 | /* iff driver uses driver model ("new style") binding model: */ | ||
44 | .id_table = foo_ids, | 41 | .id_table = foo_ids, |
45 | .probe = foo_probe, | 42 | .probe = foo_probe, |
46 | .remove = foo_remove, | 43 | .remove = foo_remove, |
@@ -49,24 +46,19 @@ static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = { | |||
49 | .detect = foo_detect, | 46 | .detect = foo_detect, |
50 | .address_data = &addr_data, | 47 | .address_data = &addr_data, |
51 | 48 | ||
52 | /* else, driver uses "legacy" binding model: */ | ||
53 | .attach_adapter = foo_attach_adapter, | ||
54 | .detach_client = foo_detach_client, | ||
55 | |||
56 | /* these may be used regardless of the driver binding model */ | ||
57 | .shutdown = foo_shutdown, /* optional */ | 49 | .shutdown = foo_shutdown, /* optional */ |
58 | .suspend = foo_suspend, /* optional */ | 50 | .suspend = foo_suspend, /* optional */ |
59 | .resume = foo_resume, /* optional */ | 51 | .resume = foo_resume, /* optional */ |
60 | .command = foo_command, /* optional */ | 52 | .command = foo_command, /* optional, deprecated */ |
61 | } | 53 | } |
62 | 54 | ||
63 | The name field is the driver name, and must not contain spaces. It | 55 | The name field is the driver name, and must not contain spaces. It |
64 | should match the module name (if the driver can be compiled as a module), | 56 | should match the module name (if the driver can be compiled as a module), |
65 | although you can use MODULE_ALIAS (passing "foo" in this example) to add | 57 | although you can use MODULE_ALIAS (passing "foo" in this example) to add |
66 | another name for the module. If the driver name doesn't match the module | 58 | another name for the module. If the driver name doesn't match the module |
67 | name, the module won't be automatically loaded (hotplug/coldplug). | 59 | name, the module won't be automatically loaded (hotplug/coldplug). |
68 | 60 | ||
69 | All other fields are for call-back functions which will be explained | 61 | All other fields are for call-back functions which will be explained |
70 | below. | 62 | below. |
71 | 63 | ||
72 | 64 | ||
@@ -74,34 +66,13 @@ Extra client data | |||
74 | ================= | 66 | ================= |
75 | 67 | ||
76 | Each client structure has a special `data' field that can point to any | 68 | Each client structure has a special `data' field that can point to any |
77 | structure at all. You should use this to keep device-specific data, | 69 | structure at all. You should use this to keep device-specific data. |
78 | especially in drivers that handle multiple I2C or SMBUS devices. You | ||
79 | do not always need this, but especially for `sensors' drivers, it can | ||
80 | be very useful. | ||
81 | 70 | ||
82 | /* store the value */ | 71 | /* store the value */ |
83 | void i2c_set_clientdata(struct i2c_client *client, void *data); | 72 | void i2c_set_clientdata(struct i2c_client *client, void *data); |
84 | 73 | ||
85 | /* retrieve the value */ | 74 | /* retrieve the value */ |
86 | void *i2c_get_clientdata(struct i2c_client *client); | 75 | void *i2c_get_clientdata(const struct i2c_client *client); |
87 | |||
88 | An example structure is below. | ||
89 | |||
90 | struct foo_data { | ||
91 | struct i2c_client client; | ||
92 | enum chips type; /* To keep the chips type for `sensors' drivers. */ | ||
93 | |||
94 | /* Because the i2c bus is slow, it is often useful to cache the read | ||
95 | information of a chip for some time (for example, 1 or 2 seconds). | ||
96 | It depends of course on the device whether this is really worthwhile | ||
97 | or even sensible. */ | ||
98 | struct mutex update_lock; /* When we are reading lots of information, | ||
99 | another process should not update the | ||
100 | below information */ | ||
101 | char valid; /* != 0 if the following fields are valid. */ | ||
102 | unsigned long last_updated; /* In jiffies */ | ||
103 | /* Add the read information here too */ | ||
104 | }; | ||
105 | 76 | ||
106 | 77 | ||
107 | Accessing the client | 78 | Accessing the client |
@@ -109,11 +80,9 @@ Accessing the client | |||
109 | 80 | ||
110 | Let's say we have a valid client structure. At some time, we will need | 81 | Let's say we have a valid client structure. At some time, we will need |
111 | to gather information from the client, or write new information to the | 82 | to gather information from the client, or write new information to the |
112 | client. How we will export this information to user-space is less | 83 | client. |
113 | important at this moment (perhaps we do not need to do this at all for | ||
114 | some obscure clients). But we need generic reading and writing routines. | ||
115 | 84 | ||
116 | I have found it useful to define foo_read and foo_write function for this. | 85 | I have found it useful to define foo_read and foo_write functions for this. |
117 | For some cases, it will be easier to call the i2c functions directly, | 86 | For some cases, it will be easier to call the i2c functions directly, |
118 | but many chips have some kind of register-value idea that can easily | 87 | but many chips have some kind of register-value idea that can easily |
119 | be encapsulated. | 88 | be encapsulated. |
@@ -121,33 +90,33 @@ be encapsulated. | |||
121 | The below functions are simple examples, and should not be copied | 90 | The below functions are simple examples, and should not be copied |
122 | literally. | 91 | literally. |
123 | 92 | ||
124 | int foo_read_value(struct i2c_client *client, u8 reg) | 93 | int foo_read_value(struct i2c_client *client, u8 reg) |
125 | { | 94 | { |
126 | if (reg < 0x10) /* byte-sized register */ | 95 | if (reg < 0x10) /* byte-sized register */ |
127 | return i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(client,reg); | 96 | return i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(client, reg); |
128 | else /* word-sized register */ | 97 | else /* word-sized register */ |
129 | return i2c_smbus_read_word_data(client,reg); | 98 | return i2c_smbus_read_word_data(client, reg); |
130 | } | 99 | } |
131 | 100 | ||
132 | int foo_write_value(struct i2c_client *client, u8 reg, u16 value) | 101 | int foo_write_value(struct i2c_client *client, u8 reg, u16 value) |
133 | { | 102 | { |
134 | if (reg == 0x10) /* Impossible to write - driver error! */ { | 103 | if (reg == 0x10) /* Impossible to write - driver error! */ |
135 | return -1; | 104 | return -EINVAL; |
136 | else if (reg < 0x10) /* byte-sized register */ | 105 | else if (reg < 0x10) /* byte-sized register */ |
137 | return i2c_smbus_write_byte_data(client,reg,value); | 106 | return i2c_smbus_write_byte_data(client, reg, value); |
138 | else /* word-sized register */ | 107 | else /* word-sized register */ |
139 | return i2c_smbus_write_word_data(client,reg,value); | 108 | return i2c_smbus_write_word_data(client, reg, value); |
140 | } | 109 | } |
141 | 110 | ||
142 | 111 | ||
143 | Probing and attaching | 112 | Probing and attaching |
144 | ===================== | 113 | ===================== |
145 | 114 | ||
146 | The Linux I2C stack was originally written to support access to hardware | 115 | The Linux I2C stack was originally written to support access to hardware |
147 | monitoring chips on PC motherboards, and thus it embeds some assumptions | 116 | monitoring chips on PC motherboards, and thus used to embed some assumptions |
148 | that are more appropriate to SMBus (and PCs) than to I2C. One of these | 117 | that were more appropriate to SMBus (and PCs) than to I2C. One of these |
149 | assumptions is that most adapters and devices drivers support the SMBUS_QUICK | 118 | assumptions was that most adapters and devices drivers support the SMBUS_QUICK |
150 | protocol to probe device presence. Another is that devices and their drivers | 119 | protocol to probe device presence. Another was that devices and their drivers |
151 | can be sufficiently configured using only such probe primitives. | 120 | can be sufficiently configured using only such probe primitives. |
152 | 121 | ||
153 | As Linux and its I2C stack became more widely used in embedded systems | 122 | As Linux and its I2C stack became more widely used in embedded systems |
@@ -164,6 +133,9 @@ since the "legacy" model requires drivers to create "i2c_client" device | |||
164 | objects after SMBus style probing, while the Linux driver model expects | 133 | objects after SMBus style probing, while the Linux driver model expects |
165 | drivers to be given such device objects in their probe() routines. | 134 | drivers to be given such device objects in their probe() routines. |
166 | 135 | ||
136 | The legacy model is deprecated now and will soon be removed, so we no | ||
137 | longer document it here. | ||
138 | |||
167 | 139 | ||
168 | Standard Driver Model Binding ("New Style") | 140 | Standard Driver Model Binding ("New Style") |
169 | ------------------------------------------- | 141 | ------------------------------------------- |
@@ -193,8 +165,8 @@ matches the device's name. It is passed the entry that was matched so | |||
193 | the driver knows which one in the table matched. | 165 | the driver knows which one in the table matched. |
194 | 166 | ||
195 | 167 | ||
196 | Device Creation (Standard driver model) | 168 | Device Creation |
197 | --------------------------------------- | 169 | --------------- |
198 | 170 | ||
199 | If you know for a fact that an I2C device is connected to a given I2C bus, | 171 | If you know for a fact that an I2C device is connected to a given I2C bus, |
200 | you can instantiate that device by simply filling an i2c_board_info | 172 | you can instantiate that device by simply filling an i2c_board_info |
@@ -221,8 +193,8 @@ in the I2C bus driver. You may want to save the returned i2c_client | |||
221 | reference for later use. | 193 | reference for later use. |
222 | 194 | ||
223 | 195 | ||
224 | Device Detection (Standard driver model) | 196 | Device Detection |
225 | ---------------------------------------- | 197 | ---------------- |
226 | 198 | ||
227 | Sometimes you do not know in advance which I2C devices are connected to | 199 | Sometimes you do not know in advance which I2C devices are connected to |
228 | a given I2C bus. This is for example the case of hardware monitoring | 200 | a given I2C bus. This is for example the case of hardware monitoring |
@@ -246,8 +218,8 @@ otherwise misdetections are likely to occur and things can get wrong | |||
246 | quickly. | 218 | quickly. |
247 | 219 | ||
248 | 220 | ||
249 | Device Deletion (Standard driver model) | 221 | Device Deletion |
250 | --------------------------------------- | 222 | --------------- |
251 | 223 | ||
252 | Each I2C device which has been created using i2c_new_device() or | 224 | Each I2C device which has been created using i2c_new_device() or |
253 | i2c_new_probed_device() can be unregistered by calling | 225 | i2c_new_probed_device() can be unregistered by calling |
@@ -256,264 +228,37 @@ called automatically before the underlying I2C bus itself is removed, as a | |||
256 | device can't survive its parent in the device driver model. | 228 | device can't survive its parent in the device driver model. |
257 | 229 | ||
258 | 230 | ||
259 | Legacy Driver Binding Model | 231 | Initializing the driver |
260 | --------------------------- | 232 | ======================= |
233 | |||
234 | When the kernel is booted, or when your foo driver module is inserted, | ||
235 | you have to do some initializing. Fortunately, just registering the | ||
236 | driver module is usually enough. | ||
261 | 237 | ||
262 | Most i2c devices can be present on several i2c addresses; for some this | 238 | static int __init foo_init(void) |
263 | is determined in hardware (by soldering some chip pins to Vcc or Ground), | 239 | { |
264 | for others this can be changed in software (by writing to specific client | 240 | return i2c_add_driver(&foo_driver); |
265 | registers). Some devices are usually on a specific address, but not always; | 241 | } |
266 | and some are even more tricky. So you will probably need to scan several | 242 | |
267 | i2c addresses for your clients, and do some sort of detection to see | 243 | static void __exit foo_cleanup(void) |
268 | whether it is actually a device supported by your driver. | 244 | { |
245 | i2c_del_driver(&foo_driver); | ||
246 | } | ||
247 | |||
248 | /* Substitute your own name and email address */ | ||
249 | MODULE_AUTHOR("Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>" | ||
250 | MODULE_DESCRIPTION("Driver for Barf Inc. Foo I2C devices"); | ||
269 | 251 | ||
270 | To give the user a maximum of possibilities, some default module parameters | 252 | /* a few non-GPL license types are also allowed */ |
271 | are defined to help determine what addresses are scanned. Several macros | 253 | MODULE_LICENSE("GPL"); |
272 | are defined in i2c.h to help you support them, as well as a generic | 254 | |
273 | detection algorithm. | 255 | module_init(foo_init); |
274 | 256 | module_exit(foo_cleanup); | |
275 | You do not have to use this parameter interface; but don't try to use | 257 | |
276 | function i2c_probe() if you don't. | 258 | Note that some functions are marked by `__init'. These functions can |
277 | 259 | be removed after kernel booting (or module loading) is completed. | |
278 | 260 | Likewise, functions marked by `__exit' are dropped by the compiler when | |
279 | Probing classes (Legacy model) | 261 | the code is built into the kernel, as they would never be called. |
280 | ------------------------------ | ||
281 | |||
282 | All parameters are given as lists of unsigned 16-bit integers. Lists are | ||
283 | terminated by I2C_CLIENT_END. | ||
284 | The following lists are used internally: | ||
285 | |||
286 | normal_i2c: filled in by the module writer. | ||
287 | A list of I2C addresses which should normally be examined. | ||
288 | probe: insmod parameter. | ||
289 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), | ||
290 | the second is the address. These addresses are also probed, as if they | ||
291 | were in the 'normal' list. | ||
292 | ignore: insmod parameter. | ||
293 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), | ||
294 | the second is the I2C address. These addresses are never probed. | ||
295 | This parameter overrules the 'normal_i2c' list only. | ||
296 | force: insmod parameter. | ||
297 | A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), | ||
298 | the second is the I2C address. A device is blindly assumed to be on | ||
299 | the given address, no probing is done. | ||
300 | |||
301 | Additionally, kind-specific force lists may optionally be defined if | ||
302 | the driver supports several chip kinds. They are grouped in a | ||
303 | NULL-terminated list of pointers named forces, those first element if the | ||
304 | generic force list mentioned above. Each additional list correspond to an | ||
305 | insmod parameter of the form force_<kind>. | ||
306 | |||
307 | Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' | ||
308 | parameter. The complete declaration could look like this: | ||
309 | |||
310 | /* Scan 0x4c to 0x4f */ | ||
311 | static const unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e, 0x4f, | ||
312 | I2C_CLIENT_END }; | ||
313 | |||
314 | /* Magic definition of all other variables and things */ | ||
315 | I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; | ||
316 | /* Or, if your driver supports, say, 2 kind of devices: */ | ||
317 | I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD_2(foo, bar); | ||
318 | |||
319 | If you use the multi-kind form, an enum will be defined for you: | ||
320 | enum chips { any_chip, foo, bar, ... } | ||
321 | You can then (and certainly should) use it in the driver code. | ||
322 | |||
323 | Note that you *have* to call the defined variable `normal_i2c', | ||
324 | without any prefix! | ||
325 | |||
326 | |||
327 | Attaching to an adapter (Legacy model) | ||
328 | -------------------------------------- | ||
329 | |||
330 | Whenever a new adapter is inserted, or for all adapters if the driver is | ||
331 | being registered, the callback attach_adapter() is called. Now is the | ||
332 | time to determine what devices are present on the adapter, and to register | ||
333 | a client for each of them. | ||
334 | |||
335 | The attach_adapter callback is really easy: we just call the generic | ||
336 | detection function. This function will scan the bus for us, using the | ||
337 | information as defined in the lists explained above. If a device is | ||
338 | detected at a specific address, another callback is called. | ||
339 | |||
340 | int foo_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adapter) | ||
341 | { | ||
342 | return i2c_probe(adapter,&addr_data,&foo_detect_client); | ||
343 | } | ||
344 | |||
345 | Remember, structure `addr_data' is defined by the macros explained above, | ||
346 | so you do not have to define it yourself. | ||
347 | |||
348 | The i2c_probe function will call the foo_detect_client | ||
349 | function only for those i2c addresses that actually have a device on | ||
350 | them (unless a `force' parameter was used). In addition, addresses that | ||
351 | are already in use (by some other registered client) are skipped. | ||
352 | |||
353 | |||
354 | The detect client function (Legacy model) | ||
355 | ----------------------------------------- | ||
356 | |||
357 | The detect client function is called by i2c_probe. The `kind' parameter | ||
358 | contains -1 for a probed detection, 0 for a forced detection, or a positive | ||
359 | number for a forced detection with a chip type forced. | ||
360 | |||
361 | Returning an error different from -ENODEV in a detect function will cause | ||
362 | the detection to stop: other addresses and adapters won't be scanned. | ||
363 | This should only be done on fatal or internal errors, such as a memory | ||
364 | shortage or i2c_attach_client failing. | ||
365 | |||
366 | For now, you can ignore the `flags' parameter. It is there for future use. | ||
367 | |||
368 | int foo_detect_client(struct i2c_adapter *adapter, int address, | ||
369 | int kind) | ||
370 | { | ||
371 | int err = 0; | ||
372 | int i; | ||
373 | struct i2c_client *client; | ||
374 | struct foo_data *data; | ||
375 | const char *name = ""; | ||
376 | |||
377 | /* Let's see whether this adapter can support what we need. | ||
378 | Please substitute the things you need here! */ | ||
379 | if (!i2c_check_functionality(adapter,I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WORD_DATA | | ||
380 | I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_WRITE_BYTE)) | ||
381 | goto ERROR0; | ||
382 | |||
383 | /* OK. For now, we presume we have a valid client. We now create the | ||
384 | client structure, even though we cannot fill it completely yet. | ||
385 | But it allows us to access several i2c functions safely */ | ||
386 | |||
387 | if (!(data = kzalloc(sizeof(struct foo_data), GFP_KERNEL))) { | ||
388 | err = -ENOMEM; | ||
389 | goto ERROR0; | ||
390 | } | ||
391 | |||
392 | client = &data->client; | ||
393 | i2c_set_clientdata(client, data); | ||
394 | |||
395 | client->addr = address; | ||
396 | client->adapter = adapter; | ||
397 | client->driver = &foo_driver; | ||
398 | |||
399 | /* Now, we do the remaining detection. If no `force' parameter is used. */ | ||
400 | |||
401 | /* First, the generic detection (if any), that is skipped if any force | ||
402 | parameter was used. */ | ||
403 | if (kind < 0) { | ||
404 | /* The below is of course bogus */ | ||
405 | if (foo_read(client, FOO_REG_GENERIC) != FOO_GENERIC_VALUE) | ||
406 | goto ERROR1; | ||
407 | } | ||
408 | |||
409 | /* Next, specific detection. This is especially important for `sensors' | ||
410 | devices. */ | ||
411 | |||
412 | /* Determine the chip type. Not needed if a `force_CHIPTYPE' parameter | ||
413 | was used. */ | ||
414 | if (kind <= 0) { | ||
415 | i = foo_read(client, FOO_REG_CHIPTYPE); | ||
416 | if (i == FOO_TYPE_1) | ||
417 | kind = chip1; /* As defined in the enum */ | ||
418 | else if (i == FOO_TYPE_2) | ||
419 | kind = chip2; | ||
420 | else { | ||
421 | printk("foo: Ignoring 'force' parameter for unknown chip at " | ||
422 | "adapter %d, address 0x%02x\n",i2c_adapter_id(adapter),address); | ||
423 | goto ERROR1; | ||
424 | } | ||
425 | } | ||
426 | |||
427 | /* Now set the type and chip names */ | ||
428 | if (kind == chip1) { | ||
429 | name = "chip1"; | ||
430 | } else if (kind == chip2) { | ||
431 | name = "chip2"; | ||
432 | } | ||
433 | |||
434 | /* Fill in the remaining client fields. */ | ||
435 | strlcpy(client->name, name, I2C_NAME_SIZE); | ||
436 | data->type = kind; | ||
437 | mutex_init(&data->update_lock); /* Only if you use this field */ | ||
438 | |||
439 | /* Any other initializations in data must be done here too. */ | ||
440 | |||
441 | /* This function can write default values to the client registers, if | ||
442 | needed. */ | ||
443 | foo_init_client(client); | ||
444 | |||
445 | /* Tell the i2c layer a new client has arrived */ | ||
446 | if ((err = i2c_attach_client(client))) | ||
447 | goto ERROR1; | ||
448 | |||
449 | return 0; | ||
450 | |||
451 | /* OK, this is not exactly good programming practice, usually. But it is | ||
452 | very code-efficient in this case. */ | ||
453 | |||
454 | ERROR1: | ||
455 | kfree(data); | ||
456 | ERROR0: | ||
457 | return err; | ||
458 | } | ||
459 | |||
460 | |||
461 | Removing the client (Legacy model) | ||
462 | ================================== | ||
463 | |||
464 | The detach_client call back function is called when a client should be | ||
465 | removed. It may actually fail, but only when panicking. This code is | ||
466 | much simpler than the attachment code, fortunately! | ||
467 | |||
468 | int foo_detach_client(struct i2c_client *client) | ||
469 | { | ||
470 | int err; | ||
471 | |||
472 | /* Try to detach the client from i2c space */ | ||
473 | if ((err = i2c_detach_client(client))) | ||
474 | return err; | ||
475 | |||
476 | kfree(i2c_get_clientdata(client)); | ||
477 | return 0; | ||
478 | } | ||
479 | |||
480 | |||
481 | Initializing the module or kernel | ||
482 | ================================= | ||
483 | |||
484 | When the kernel is booted, or when your foo driver module is inserted, | ||
485 | you have to do some initializing. Fortunately, just attaching (registering) | ||
486 | the driver module is usually enough. | ||
487 | |||
488 | static int __init foo_init(void) | ||
489 | { | ||
490 | int res; | ||
491 | |||
492 | if ((res = i2c_add_driver(&foo_driver))) { | ||
493 | printk("foo: Driver registration failed, module not inserted.\n"); | ||
494 | return res; | ||
495 | } | ||
496 | return 0; | ||
497 | } | ||
498 | |||
499 | static void __exit foo_cleanup(void) | ||
500 | { | ||
501 | i2c_del_driver(&foo_driver); | ||
502 | } | ||
503 | |||
504 | /* Substitute your own name and email address */ | ||
505 | MODULE_AUTHOR("Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>" | ||
506 | MODULE_DESCRIPTION("Driver for Barf Inc. Foo I2C devices"); | ||
507 | |||
508 | /* a few non-GPL license types are also allowed */ | ||
509 | MODULE_LICENSE("GPL"); | ||
510 | |||
511 | module_init(foo_init); | ||
512 | module_exit(foo_cleanup); | ||
513 | |||
514 | Note that some functions are marked by `__init', and some data structures | ||
515 | by `__initdata'. These functions and structures can be removed after | ||
516 | kernel booting (or module loading) is completed. | ||
517 | 262 | ||
518 | 263 | ||
519 | Power Management | 264 | Power Management |
@@ -548,33 +293,35 @@ Command function | |||
548 | 293 | ||
549 | A generic ioctl-like function call back is supported. You will seldom | 294 | A generic ioctl-like function call back is supported. You will seldom |
550 | need this, and its use is deprecated anyway, so newer design should not | 295 | need this, and its use is deprecated anyway, so newer design should not |
551 | use it. Set it to NULL. | 296 | use it. |
552 | 297 | ||
553 | 298 | ||
554 | Sending and receiving | 299 | Sending and receiving |
555 | ===================== | 300 | ===================== |
556 | 301 | ||
557 | If you want to communicate with your device, there are several functions | 302 | If you want to communicate with your device, there are several functions |
558 | to do this. You can find all of them in i2c.h. | 303 | to do this. You can find all of them in <linux/i2c.h>. |
559 | 304 | ||
560 | If you can choose between plain i2c communication and SMBus level | 305 | If you can choose between plain I2C communication and SMBus level |
561 | communication, please use the last. All adapters understand SMBus level | 306 | communication, please use the latter. All adapters understand SMBus level |
562 | commands, but only some of them understand plain i2c! | 307 | commands, but only some of them understand plain I2C! |
563 | 308 | ||
564 | 309 | ||
565 | Plain i2c communication | 310 | Plain I2C communication |
566 | ----------------------- | 311 | ----------------------- |
567 | 312 | ||
568 | extern int i2c_master_send(struct i2c_client *,const char* ,int); | 313 | int i2c_master_send(struct i2c_client *client, const char *buf, |
569 | extern int i2c_master_recv(struct i2c_client *,char* ,int); | 314 | int count); |
315 | int i2c_master_recv(struct i2c_client *client, char *buf, int count); | ||
570 | 316 | ||
571 | These routines read and write some bytes from/to a client. The client | 317 | These routines read and write some bytes from/to a client. The client |
572 | contains the i2c address, so you do not have to include it. The second | 318 | contains the i2c address, so you do not have to include it. The second |
573 | parameter contains the bytes the read/write, the third the length of the | 319 | parameter contains the bytes to read/write, the third the number of bytes |
574 | buffer. Returned is the actual number of bytes read/written. | 320 | to read/write (must be less than the length of the buffer.) Returned is |
575 | 321 | the actual number of bytes read/written. | |
576 | extern int i2c_transfer(struct i2c_adapter *adap, struct i2c_msg *msg, | 322 | |
577 | int num); | 323 | int i2c_transfer(struct i2c_adapter *adap, struct i2c_msg *msg, |
324 | int num); | ||
578 | 325 | ||
579 | This sends a series of messages. Each message can be a read or write, | 326 | This sends a series of messages. Each message can be a read or write, |
580 | and they can be mixed in any way. The transactions are combined: no | 327 | and they can be mixed in any way. The transactions are combined: no |
@@ -583,49 +330,45 @@ for each message the client address, the number of bytes of the message | |||
583 | and the message data itself. | 330 | and the message data itself. |
584 | 331 | ||
585 | You can read the file `i2c-protocol' for more information about the | 332 | You can read the file `i2c-protocol' for more information about the |
586 | actual i2c protocol. | 333 | actual I2C protocol. |
587 | 334 | ||
588 | 335 | ||
589 | SMBus communication | 336 | SMBus communication |
590 | ------------------- | 337 | ------------------- |
591 | 338 | ||
592 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_xfer (struct i2c_adapter * adapter, u16 addr, | 339 | s32 i2c_smbus_xfer(struct i2c_adapter *adapter, u16 addr, |
593 | unsigned short flags, | 340 | unsigned short flags, char read_write, u8 command, |
594 | char read_write, u8 command, int size, | 341 | int size, union i2c_smbus_data *data); |
595 | union i2c_smbus_data * data); | 342 | |
596 | 343 | This is the generic SMBus function. All functions below are implemented | |
597 | This is the generic SMBus function. All functions below are implemented | 344 | in terms of it. Never use this function directly! |
598 | in terms of it. Never use this function directly! | 345 | |
599 | 346 | s32 i2c_smbus_read_byte(struct i2c_client *client); | |
600 | 347 | s32 i2c_smbus_write_byte(struct i2c_client *client, u8 value); | |
601 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_byte(struct i2c_client * client); | 348 | s32 i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 command); |
602 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_byte(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value); | 349 | s32 i2c_smbus_write_byte_data(struct i2c_client *client, |
603 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command); | 350 | u8 command, u8 value); |
604 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_byte_data(struct i2c_client * client, | 351 | s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 command); |
605 | u8 command, u8 value); | 352 | s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, |
606 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, u8 command); | 353 | u8 command, u16 value); |
607 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client * client, | 354 | s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client *client, |
608 | u8 command, u16 value); | 355 | u8 command, u16 value); |
609 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_process_call(struct i2c_client *client, | 356 | s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client *client, |
610 | u8 command, u16 value); | 357 | u8 command, u8 *values); |
611 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, | 358 | s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client *client, |
612 | u8 command, u8 *values); | 359 | u8 command, u8 length, const u8 *values); |
613 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, | 360 | s32 i2c_smbus_read_i2c_block_data(struct i2c_client *client, |
614 | u8 command, u8 length, | 361 | u8 command, u8 length, u8 *values); |
615 | u8 *values); | 362 | s32 i2c_smbus_write_i2c_block_data(struct i2c_client *client, |
616 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_read_i2c_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, | 363 | u8 command, u8 length, |
617 | u8 command, u8 length, u8 *values); | 364 | const u8 *values); |
618 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_i2c_block_data(struct i2c_client * client, | ||
619 | u8 command, u8 length, | ||
620 | u8 *values); | ||
621 | 365 | ||
622 | These ones were removed from i2c-core because they had no users, but could | 366 | These ones were removed from i2c-core because they had no users, but could |
623 | be added back later if needed: | 367 | be added back later if needed: |
624 | 368 | ||
625 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client * client, u8 value); | 369 | s32 i2c_smbus_write_quick(struct i2c_client *client, u8 value); |
626 | extern s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client, | 370 | s32 i2c_smbus_block_process_call(struct i2c_client *client, |
627 | u8 command, u8 length, | 371 | u8 command, u8 length, u8 *values); |
628 | u8 *values) | ||
629 | 372 | ||
630 | All these transactions return a negative errno value on failure. The 'write' | 373 | All these transactions return a negative errno value on failure. The 'write' |
631 | transactions return 0 on success; the 'read' transactions return the read | 374 | transactions return 0 on success; the 'read' transactions return the read |
@@ -642,7 +385,5 @@ General purpose routines | |||
642 | Below all general purpose routines are listed, that were not mentioned | 385 | Below all general purpose routines are listed, that were not mentioned |
643 | before. | 386 | before. |
644 | 387 | ||
645 | /* This call returns a unique low identifier for each registered adapter. | 388 | /* Return the adapter number for a specific adapter */ |
646 | */ | 389 | int i2c_adapter_id(struct i2c_adapter *adap); |
647 | extern int i2c_adapter_id(struct i2c_adapter *adap); | ||
648 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/.gitignore b/Documentation/ia64/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ab806edc8732 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ia64/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
aliasing-test | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt b/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c61a99f7c8bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ | |||
1 | Recipe for getting/building/running Xen/ia64 with pv_ops | ||
2 | -------------------------------------------------------- | ||
3 | |||
4 | This recipe describes how to get xen-ia64 source and build it, | ||
5 | and run domU with pv_ops. | ||
6 | |||
7 | ============ | ||
8 | Requirements | ||
9 | ============ | ||
10 | |||
11 | - python | ||
12 | - mercurial | ||
13 | it (aka "hg") is an open-source source code | ||
14 | management software. See the below. | ||
15 | http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/wiki/ | ||
16 | - git | ||
17 | - bridge-utils | ||
18 | |||
19 | ================================= | ||
20 | Getting and Building Xen and Dom0 | ||
21 | ================================= | ||
22 | |||
23 | My environment is; | ||
24 | Machine : Tiger4 | ||
25 | Domain0 OS : RHEL5 | ||
26 | DomainU OS : RHEL5 | ||
27 | |||
28 | 1. Download source | ||
29 | # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/xen-unstable.hg | ||
30 | # cd xen-unstable.hg | ||
31 | # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/linux-2.6.18-xen.hg | ||
32 | |||
33 | 2. # make world | ||
34 | |||
35 | 3. # make install-tools | ||
36 | |||
37 | 4. copy kernels and xen | ||
38 | # cp xen/xen.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/ | ||
39 | # cp build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64/vmlinux.gz \ | ||
40 | /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen | ||
41 | |||
42 | 5. make initrd for Dom0/DomU | ||
43 | # make -C linux-2.6.18-xen.hg ARCH=ia64 modules_install \ | ||
44 | O=$(/bin/pwd)/build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64 | ||
45 | # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img \ | ||
46 | 2.6.18.8-xen --builtin mptspi --builtin mptbase \ | ||
47 | --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd --builtin ohci-hcd \ | ||
48 | --builtin ehci-hcd | ||
49 | |||
50 | ================================ | ||
51 | Making a disk image for guest OS | ||
52 | ================================ | ||
53 | |||
54 | 1. make file | ||
55 | # dd if=/dev/zero of=/root/rhel5.img bs=1M seek=4096 count=0 | ||
56 | # mke2fs -F -j /root/rhel5.img | ||
57 | # mount -o loop /root/rhel5.img /mnt | ||
58 | # cp -ax /{dev,var,etc,usr,bin,sbin,lib} /mnt | ||
59 | # mkdir /mnt/{root,proc,sys,home,tmp} | ||
60 | |||
61 | Note: You may miss some device files. If so, please create them | ||
62 | with mknod. Or you can use tar instead of cp. | ||
63 | |||
64 | 2. modify DomU's fstab | ||
65 | # vi /mnt/etc/fstab | ||
66 | /dev/xvda1 / ext3 defaults 1 1 | ||
67 | none /dev/pts devpts gid=5,mode=620 0 0 | ||
68 | none /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0 | ||
69 | none /proc proc defaults 0 0 | ||
70 | none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0 | ||
71 | |||
72 | 3. modify inittab | ||
73 | set runlevel to 3 to avoid X trying to start | ||
74 | # vi /mnt/etc/inittab | ||
75 | id:3:initdefault: | ||
76 | Start a getty on the hvc0 console | ||
77 | X0:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty hvc0 | ||
78 | tty1-6 mingetty can be commented out | ||
79 | |||
80 | 4. add hvc0 into /etc/securetty | ||
81 | # vi /mnt/etc/securetty (add hvc0) | ||
82 | |||
83 | 5. umount | ||
84 | # umount /mnt | ||
85 | |||
86 | FYI, virt-manager can also make a disk image for guest OS. | ||
87 | It's GUI tools and easy to make it. | ||
88 | |||
89 | ================== | ||
90 | Boot Xen & Domain0 | ||
91 | ================== | ||
92 | |||
93 | 1. replace elilo | ||
94 | elilo of RHEL5 can boot Xen and Dom0. | ||
95 | If you use old elilo (e.g RHEL4), please download from the below | ||
96 | http://elilo.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/blosxom | ||
97 | and copy into /boot/efi/efi/redhat/ | ||
98 | # cp elilo-3.6-ia64.efi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.efi | ||
99 | |||
100 | 2. modify elilo.conf (like the below) | ||
101 | # vi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.conf | ||
102 | prompt | ||
103 | timeout=20 | ||
104 | default=xen | ||
105 | relocatable | ||
106 | |||
107 | image=vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen | ||
108 | label=xen | ||
109 | vmm=xen.gz | ||
110 | initrd=initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img | ||
111 | read-only | ||
112 | append=" -- rhgb root=/dev/sda2" | ||
113 | |||
114 | The append options before "--" are for xen hypervisor, | ||
115 | the options after "--" are for dom0. | ||
116 | |||
117 | FYI, your machine may need console options like | ||
118 | "com1=19200,8n1 console=vga,com1". For example, | ||
119 | append="com1=19200,8n1 console=vga,com1 -- rhgb console=tty0 \ | ||
120 | console=ttyS0 root=/dev/sda2" | ||
121 | |||
122 | ===================================== | ||
123 | Getting and Building domU with pv_ops | ||
124 | ===================================== | ||
125 | |||
126 | 1. get pv_ops tree | ||
127 | # git clone http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/linux-2.6-xen-ia64.git/ | ||
128 | |||
129 | 2. git branch (if necessary) | ||
130 | # cd linux-2.6-xen-ia64/ | ||
131 | # git checkout -b your_branch origin/xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19 | ||
132 | (Note: The current branch is xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19. | ||
133 | But you would find the new branch. You can see with | ||
134 | "git branch -r" to get the branch lists. | ||
135 | http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/for_eagl/linux-2.6-ia64-pv-ops.git/ | ||
136 | is also available. The tree is based on | ||
137 | git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6 test) | ||
138 | |||
139 | |||
140 | 3. copy .config for pv_ops of domU | ||
141 | # cp arch/ia64/configs/xen_domu_wip_defconfig .config | ||
142 | |||
143 | 4. make kernel with pv_ops | ||
144 | # make oldconfig | ||
145 | # make | ||
146 | |||
147 | 5. install the kernel and initrd | ||
148 | # cp vmlinux.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU | ||
149 | # make modules_install | ||
150 | # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img \ | ||
151 | 2.6.26-rc3xen-ia64-08941-g1b12161 --builtin mptspi \ | ||
152 | --builtin mptbase --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd \ | ||
153 | --builtin ohci-hcd --builtin ehci-hcd | ||
154 | |||
155 | ======================== | ||
156 | Boot DomainU with pv_ops | ||
157 | ======================== | ||
158 | |||
159 | 1. make config of DomU | ||
160 | # vi /etc/xen/rhel5 | ||
161 | kernel = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU" | ||
162 | ramdisk = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img" | ||
163 | vcpus = 1 | ||
164 | memory = 512 | ||
165 | name = "rhel5" | ||
166 | disk = [ 'file:/root/rhel5.img,xvda1,w' ] | ||
167 | root = "/dev/xvda1 ro" | ||
168 | extra= "rhgb console=hvc0" | ||
169 | |||
170 | 2. After boot xen and dom0, start xend | ||
171 | # /etc/init.d/xend start | ||
172 | ( In the debugging case, # XEND_DEBUG=1 xend trace_start ) | ||
173 | |||
174 | 3. start domU | ||
175 | # xm create -c rhel5 | ||
176 | |||
177 | ========= | ||
178 | Reference | ||
179 | ========= | ||
180 | - Wiki of Xen/IA64 upstream merge | ||
181 | http://wiki.xensource.com/xenwiki/XenIA64/UpstreamMerge | ||
182 | |||
183 | Written by Akio Takebe <takebe_akio@jp.fujitsu.com> on 28 May 2008 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ics932s401 b/Documentation/ics932s401 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..07a739f406d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ics932s401 | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ | |||
1 | Kernel driver ics932s401 | ||
2 | ====================== | ||
3 | |||
4 | Supported chips: | ||
5 | * IDT ICS932S401 | ||
6 | Prefix: 'ics932s401' | ||
7 | Addresses scanned: I2C 0x69 | ||
8 | Datasheet: Publically available at the IDT website | ||
9 | |||
10 | Author: Darrick J. Wong | ||
11 | |||
12 | Description | ||
13 | ----------- | ||
14 | |||
15 | This driver implements support for the IDT ICS932S401 chip family. | ||
16 | |||
17 | This chip has 4 clock outputs--a base clock for the CPU (which is likely | ||
18 | multiplied to get the real CPU clock), a system clock, a PCI clock, a USB | ||
19 | clock, and a reference clock. The driver reports selected and actual | ||
20 | frequency. If spread spectrum mode is enabled, the driver also reports by what | ||
21 | percent the clock signal is being spread, which should be between 0 and -0.5%. | ||
22 | All frequencies are reported in KHz. | ||
23 | |||
24 | The ICS932S401 monitors all inputs continuously. The driver will not read | ||
25 | the registers more often than once every other second. | ||
26 | |||
27 | Special Features | ||
28 | ---------------- | ||
29 | |||
30 | The clocks could be reprogrammed to increase system speed. I will not help you | ||
31 | do this, as you risk damaging your system! | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/input/elantech.txt b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a10c3b6ba7c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,405 @@ | |||
1 | Elantech Touchpad Driver | ||
2 | ======================== | ||
3 | |||
4 | Copyright (C) 2007-2008 Arjan Opmeer <arjan@opmeer.net> | ||
5 | |||
6 | Extra information for hardware version 1 found and | ||
7 | provided by Steve Havelka | ||
8 | |||
9 | Version 2 (EeePC) hardware support based on patches | ||
10 | received from Woody at Xandros and forwarded to me | ||
11 | by user StewieGriffin at the eeeuser.com forum | ||
12 | |||
13 | |||
14 | Contents | ||
15 | ~~~~~~~~ | ||
16 | |||
17 | 1. Introduction | ||
18 | 2. Extra knobs | ||
19 | 3. Hardware version 1 | ||
20 | 3.1 Registers | ||
21 | 3.2 Native relative mode 4 byte packet format | ||
22 | 3.3 Native absolute mode 4 byte packet format | ||
23 | 4. Hardware version 2 | ||
24 | 4.1 Registers | ||
25 | 4.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format | ||
26 | 4.2.1 One finger touch | ||
27 | 4.2.2 Two finger touch | ||
28 | |||
29 | |||
30 | |||
31 | 1. Introduction | ||
32 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
33 | |||
34 | Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver is aware of two different | ||
35 | hardware versions unimaginatively called version 1 and version 2. Version 1 | ||
36 | is found in "older" laptops and uses 4 bytes per packet. Version 2 seems to | ||
37 | be introduced with the EeePC and uses 6 bytes per packet. | ||
38 | |||
39 | The driver tries to support both hardware versions and should be compatible | ||
40 | with the Xorg Synaptics touchpad driver and its graphical configuration | ||
41 | utilities. | ||
42 | |||
43 | Additionally the operation of the touchpad can be altered by adjusting the | ||
44 | contents of some of its internal registers. These registers are represented | ||
45 | by the driver as sysfs entries under /sys/bus/serio/drivers/psmouse/serio? | ||
46 | that can be read from and written to. | ||
47 | |||
48 | Currently only the registers for hardware version 1 are somewhat understood. | ||
49 | Hardware version 2 seems to use some of the same registers but it is not | ||
50 | known whether the bits in the registers represent the same thing or might | ||
51 | have changed their meaning. | ||
52 | |||
53 | On top of that, some register settings have effect only when the touchpad is | ||
54 | in relative mode and not in absolute mode. As the Linux Elantech touchpad | ||
55 | driver always puts the hardware into absolute mode not all information | ||
56 | mentioned below can be used immediately. But because there is no freely | ||
57 | available Elantech documentation the information is provided here anyway for | ||
58 | completeness sake. | ||
59 | |||
60 | |||
61 | ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// | ||
62 | |||
63 | |||
64 | 2. Extra knobs | ||
65 | ~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
66 | |||
67 | Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver provides two extra knobs under | ||
68 | /sys/bus/serio/drivers/psmouse/serio? for the user. | ||
69 | |||
70 | * debug | ||
71 | |||
72 | Turn different levels of debugging ON or OFF. | ||
73 | |||
74 | By echoing "0" to this file all debugging will be turned OFF. | ||
75 | |||
76 | Currently a value of "1" will turn on some basic debugging and a value of | ||
77 | "2" will turn on packet debugging. For hardware version 1 the default is | ||
78 | OFF. For version 2 the default is "1". | ||
79 | |||
80 | Turning packet debugging on will make the driver dump every packet | ||
81 | received to the syslog before processing it. Be warned that this can | ||
82 | generate quite a lot of data! | ||
83 | |||
84 | * paritycheck | ||
85 | |||
86 | Turns parity checking ON or OFF. | ||
87 | |||
88 | By echoing "0" to this file parity checking will be turned OFF. Any | ||
89 | non-zero value will turn it ON. For hardware version 1 the default is ON. | ||
90 | For version 2 the default it is OFF. | ||
91 | |||
92 | Hardware version 1 provides basic data integrity verification by | ||
93 | calculating a parity bit for the last 3 bytes of each packet. The driver | ||
94 | can check these bits and reject any packet that appears corrupted. Using | ||
95 | this knob you can bypass that check. | ||
96 | |||
97 | It is not known yet whether hardware version 2 provides the same parity | ||
98 | bits. Hence checking is disabled by default. Currently even turning it on | ||
99 | will do nothing. | ||
100 | |||
101 | |||
102 | ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// | ||
103 | |||
104 | |||
105 | 3. Hardware version 1 | ||
106 | ================== | ||
107 | |||
108 | 3.1 Registers | ||
109 | ~~~~~~~~~ | ||
110 | |||
111 | By echoing a hexadecimal value to a register it contents can be altered. | ||
112 | |||
113 | For example: | ||
114 | |||
115 | echo -n 0x16 > reg_10 | ||
116 | |||
117 | * reg_10 | ||
118 | |||
119 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
120 | B C T D L A S E | ||
121 | |||
122 | E: 1 = enable smart edges unconditionally | ||
123 | S: 1 = enable smart edges only when dragging | ||
124 | A: 1 = absolute mode (needs 4 byte packets, see reg_11) | ||
125 | L: 1 = enable drag lock (see reg_22) | ||
126 | D: 1 = disable dynamic resolution | ||
127 | T: 1 = disable tapping | ||
128 | C: 1 = enable corner tap | ||
129 | B: 1 = swap left and right button | ||
130 | |||
131 | * reg_11 | ||
132 | |||
133 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
134 | 1 0 0 H V 1 F P | ||
135 | |||
136 | P: 1 = enable parity checking for relative mode | ||
137 | F: 1 = enable native 4 byte packet mode | ||
138 | V: 1 = enable vertical scroll area | ||
139 | H: 1 = enable horizontal scroll area | ||
140 | |||
141 | * reg_20 | ||
142 | |||
143 | single finger width? | ||
144 | |||
145 | * reg_21 | ||
146 | |||
147 | scroll area width (small: 0x40 ... wide: 0xff) | ||
148 | |||
149 | * reg_22 | ||
150 | |||
151 | drag lock time out (short: 0x14 ... long: 0xfe; | ||
152 | 0xff = tap again to release) | ||
153 | |||
154 | * reg_23 | ||
155 | |||
156 | tap make timeout? | ||
157 | |||
158 | * reg_24 | ||
159 | |||
160 | tap release timeout? | ||
161 | |||
162 | * reg_25 | ||
163 | |||
164 | smart edge cursor speed (0x02 = slow, 0x03 = medium, 0x04 = fast) | ||
165 | |||
166 | * reg_26 | ||
167 | |||
168 | smart edge activation area width? | ||
169 | |||
170 | |||
171 | 3.2 Native relative mode 4 byte packet format | ||
172 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
173 | |||
174 | byte 0: | ||
175 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
176 | c c p2 p1 1 M R L | ||
177 | |||
178 | L, R, M = 1 when Left, Right, Middle mouse button pressed | ||
179 | some models have M as byte 3 odd parity bit | ||
180 | when parity checking is enabled (reg_11, P = 1): | ||
181 | p1..p2 = byte 1 and 2 odd parity bit | ||
182 | c = 1 when corner tap detected | ||
183 | |||
184 | byte 1: | ||
185 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
186 | dx7 dx6 dx5 dx4 dx3 dx2 dx1 dx0 | ||
187 | |||
188 | dx7..dx0 = x movement; positive = right, negative = left | ||
189 | byte 1 = 0xf0 when corner tap detected | ||
190 | |||
191 | byte 2: | ||
192 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
193 | dy7 dy6 dy5 dy4 dy3 dy2 dy1 dy0 | ||
194 | |||
195 | dy7..dy0 = y movement; positive = up, negative = down | ||
196 | |||
197 | byte 3: | ||
198 | parity checking enabled (reg_11, P = 1): | ||
199 | |||
200 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
201 | w h n1 n0 ds3 ds2 ds1 ds0 | ||
202 | |||
203 | normally: | ||
204 | ds3..ds0 = scroll wheel amount and direction | ||
205 | positive = down or left | ||
206 | negative = up or right | ||
207 | when corner tap detected: | ||
208 | ds0 = 1 when top right corner tapped | ||
209 | ds1 = 1 when bottom right corner tapped | ||
210 | ds2 = 1 when bottom left corner tapped | ||
211 | ds3 = 1 when top left corner tapped | ||
212 | n1..n0 = number of fingers on touchpad | ||
213 | only models with firmware 2.x report this, models with | ||
214 | firmware 1.x seem to map one, two and three finger taps | ||
215 | directly to L, M and R mouse buttons | ||
216 | h = 1 when horizontal scroll action | ||
217 | w = 1 when wide finger touch? | ||
218 | |||
219 | otherwise (reg_11, P = 0): | ||
220 | |||
221 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
222 | ds7 ds6 ds5 ds4 ds3 ds2 ds1 ds0 | ||
223 | |||
224 | ds7..ds0 = vertical scroll amount and direction | ||
225 | negative = up | ||
226 | positive = down | ||
227 | |||
228 | |||
229 | 3.3 Native absolute mode 4 byte packet format | ||
230 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
231 | |||
232 | byte 0: | ||
233 | firmware version 1.x: | ||
234 | |||
235 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
236 | D U p1 p2 1 p3 R L | ||
237 | |||
238 | L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed | ||
239 | p1..p3 = byte 1..3 odd parity bit | ||
240 | D, U = 1 when rocker switch pressed Up, Down | ||
241 | |||
242 | firmware version 2.x: | ||
243 | |||
244 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
245 | n1 n0 p2 p1 1 p3 R L | ||
246 | |||
247 | L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed | ||
248 | p1..p3 = byte 1..3 odd parity bit | ||
249 | n1..n0 = number of fingers on touchpad | ||
250 | |||
251 | byte 1: | ||
252 | firmware version 1.x: | ||
253 | |||
254 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
255 | f 0 th tw x9 x8 y9 y8 | ||
256 | |||
257 | tw = 1 when two finger touch | ||
258 | th = 1 when three finger touch | ||
259 | f = 1 when finger touch | ||
260 | |||
261 | firmware version 2.x: | ||
262 | |||
263 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
264 | . . . . x9 x8 y9 y8 | ||
265 | |||
266 | byte 2: | ||
267 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
268 | x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 | ||
269 | |||
270 | x9..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal) | ||
271 | |||
272 | byte 3: | ||
273 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
274 | y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 | ||
275 | |||
276 | y9..y0 = absolute y value (vertical) | ||
277 | |||
278 | |||
279 | ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// | ||
280 | |||
281 | |||
282 | 4. Hardware version 2 | ||
283 | ================== | ||
284 | |||
285 | |||
286 | 4.1 Registers | ||
287 | ~~~~~~~~~ | ||
288 | |||
289 | By echoing a hexadecimal value to a register it contents can be altered. | ||
290 | |||
291 | For example: | ||
292 | |||
293 | echo -n 0x56 > reg_10 | ||
294 | |||
295 | * reg_10 | ||
296 | |||
297 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
298 | 0 1 0 1 0 1 D 0 | ||
299 | |||
300 | D: 1 = enable drag and drop | ||
301 | |||
302 | * reg_11 | ||
303 | |||
304 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
305 | 1 0 0 0 S 0 1 0 | ||
306 | |||
307 | S: 1 = enable vertical scroll | ||
308 | |||
309 | * reg_21 | ||
310 | |||
311 | unknown (0x00) | ||
312 | |||
313 | * reg_22 | ||
314 | |||
315 | drag and drop release time out (short: 0x70 ... long 0x7e; | ||
316 | 0x7f = never i.e. tap again to release) | ||
317 | |||
318 | |||
319 | 4.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format | ||
320 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
321 | |||
322 | 4.2.1 One finger touch | ||
323 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
324 | |||
325 | byte 0: | ||
326 | |||
327 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
328 | n1 n0 . . . . R L | ||
329 | |||
330 | L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed | ||
331 | n1..n0 = numbers of fingers on touchpad | ||
332 | |||
333 | byte 1: | ||
334 | |||
335 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
336 | x15 x14 x13 x12 x11 x10 x9 x8 | ||
337 | |||
338 | byte 2: | ||
339 | |||
340 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
341 | x7 x6 x5 x4 x4 x2 x1 x0 | ||
342 | |||
343 | x15..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal) | ||
344 | |||
345 | byte 3: | ||
346 | |||
347 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
348 | . . . . . . . . | ||
349 | |||
350 | byte 4: | ||
351 | |||
352 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
353 | y15 y14 y13 y12 y11 y10 y8 y8 | ||
354 | |||
355 | byte 5: | ||
356 | |||
357 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
358 | y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 | ||
359 | |||
360 | y15..y0 = absolute y value (vertical) | ||
361 | |||
362 | |||
363 | 4.2.2 Two finger touch | ||
364 | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ||
365 | |||
366 | byte 0: | ||
367 | |||
368 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
369 | n1 n0 ay8 ax8 . . R L | ||
370 | |||
371 | L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed | ||
372 | n1..n0 = numbers of fingers on touchpad | ||
373 | |||
374 | byte 1: | ||
375 | |||
376 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
377 | ax7 ax6 ax5 ax4 ax3 ax2 ax1 ax0 | ||
378 | |||
379 | ax8..ax0 = first finger absolute x value | ||
380 | |||
381 | byte 2: | ||
382 | |||
383 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
384 | ay7 ay6 ay5 ay4 ay3 ay2 ay1 ay0 | ||
385 | |||
386 | ay8..ay0 = first finger absolute y value | ||
387 | |||
388 | byte 3: | ||
389 | |||
390 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
391 | . . by8 bx8 . . . . | ||
392 | |||
393 | byte 4: | ||
394 | |||
395 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
396 | bx7 bx6 bx5 bx4 bx3 bx2 bx1 bx0 | ||
397 | |||
398 | bx8..bx0 = second finger absolute x value | ||
399 | |||
400 | byte 5: | ||
401 | |||
402 | bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 | ||
403 | by7 by8 by5 by4 by3 by2 by1 by0 | ||
404 | |||
405 | by8..by0 = second finger absolute y value | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/input/input-programming.txt b/Documentation/input/input-programming.txt index 81905e81585e..7f8b9d97bc47 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/input-programming.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/input-programming.txt | |||
@@ -20,10 +20,11 @@ pressed or released a BUTTON_IRQ happens. The driver could look like: | |||
20 | 20 | ||
21 | static struct input_dev *button_dev; | 21 | static struct input_dev *button_dev; |
22 | 22 | ||
23 | static void button_interrupt(int irq, void *dummy, struct pt_regs *fp) | 23 | static irqreturn_t button_interrupt(int irq, void *dummy) |
24 | { | 24 | { |
25 | input_report_key(button_dev, BTN_0, inb(BUTTON_PORT) & 1); | 25 | input_report_key(button_dev, BTN_0, inb(BUTTON_PORT) & 1); |
26 | input_sync(button_dev); | 26 | input_sync(button_dev); |
27 | return IRQ_HANDLED; | ||
27 | } | 28 | } |
28 | 29 | ||
29 | static int __init button_init(void) | 30 | static int __init button_init(void) |
diff --git a/Documentation/io-mapping.txt b/Documentation/io-mapping.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..473e43b2d588 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/io-mapping.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ | |||
1 | The io_mapping functions in linux/io-mapping.h provide an abstraction for | ||
2 | efficiently mapping small regions of an I/O device to the CPU. The initial | ||
3 | usage is to support the large graphics aperture on 32-bit processors where | ||
4 | ioremap_wc cannot be used to statically map the entire aperture to the CPU | ||
5 | as it would consume too much of the kernel address space. | ||
6 | |||
7 | A mapping object is created during driver initialization using | ||
8 | |||
9 | struct io_mapping *io_mapping_create_wc(unsigned long base, | ||
10 | unsigned long size) | ||
11 | |||
12 | 'base' is the bus address of the region to be made | ||
13 | mappable, while 'size' indicates how large a mapping region to | ||
14 | enable. Both are in bytes. | ||
15 | |||
16 | This _wc variant provides a mapping which may only be used | ||
17 | with the io_mapping_map_atomic_wc or io_mapping_map_wc. | ||
18 | |||
19 | With this mapping object, individual pages can be mapped either atomically | ||
20 | or not, depending on the necessary scheduling environment. Of course, atomic | ||
21 | maps are more efficient: | ||
22 | |||
23 | void *io_mapping_map_atomic_wc(struct io_mapping *mapping, | ||
24 | unsigned long offset) | ||
25 | |||
26 | 'offset' is the offset within the defined mapping region. | ||
27 | Accessing addresses beyond the region specified in the | ||
28 | creation function yields undefined results. Using an offset | ||
29 | which is not page aligned yields an undefined result. The | ||
30 | return value points to a single page in CPU address space. | ||
31 | |||
32 | This _wc variant returns a write-combining map to the | ||
33 | page and may only be used with mappings created by | ||
34 | io_mapping_create_wc | ||
35 | |||
36 | Note that the task may not sleep while holding this page | ||
37 | mapped. | ||
38 | |||
39 | void io_mapping_unmap_atomic(void *vaddr) | ||
40 | |||
41 | 'vaddr' must be the the value returned by the last | ||
42 | io_mapping_map_atomic_wc call. This unmaps the specified | ||
43 | page and allows the task to sleep once again. | ||
44 | |||
45 | If you need to sleep while holding the lock, you can use the non-atomic | ||
46 | variant, although they may be significantly slower. | ||
47 | |||
48 | void *io_mapping_map_wc(struct io_mapping *mapping, | ||
49 | unsigned long offset) | ||
50 | |||
51 | This works like io_mapping_map_atomic_wc except it allows | ||
52 | the task to sleep while holding the page mapped. | ||
53 | |||
54 | void io_mapping_unmap(void *vaddr) | ||
55 | |||
56 | This works like io_mapping_unmap_atomic, except it is used | ||
57 | for pages mapped with io_mapping_map_wc. | ||
58 | |||
59 | At driver close time, the io_mapping object must be freed: | ||
60 | |||
61 | void io_mapping_free(struct io_mapping *mapping) | ||
62 | |||
63 | Current Implementation: | ||
64 | |||
65 | The initial implementation of these functions uses existing mapping | ||
66 | mechanisms and so provides only an abstraction layer and no new | ||
67 | functionality. | ||
68 | |||
69 | On 64-bit processors, io_mapping_create_wc calls ioremap_wc for the whole | ||
70 | range, creating a permanent kernel-visible mapping to the resource. The | ||
71 | map_atomic and map functions add the requested offset to the base of the | ||
72 | virtual address returned by ioremap_wc. | ||
73 | |||
74 | On 32-bit processors with HIGHMEM defined, io_mapping_map_atomic_wc uses | ||
75 | kmap_atomic_pfn to map the specified page in an atomic fashion; | ||
76 | kmap_atomic_pfn isn't really supposed to be used with device pages, but it | ||
77 | provides an efficient mapping for this usage. | ||
78 | |||
79 | On 32-bit processors without HIGHMEM defined, io_mapping_map_atomic_wc and | ||
80 | io_mapping_map_wc both use ioremap_wc, a terribly inefficient function which | ||
81 | performs an IPI to inform all processors about the new mapping. This results | ||
82 | in a significant performance penalty. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/00-INDEX b/Documentation/ioctl/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d2fe4d4729ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/00-INDEX | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ | |||
1 | 00-INDEX | ||
2 | - this file | ||
3 | cdrom.txt | ||
4 | - summary of CDROM ioctl calls | ||
5 | hdio.txt | ||
6 | - summary of HDIO_ ioctl calls | ||
7 | ioctl-decoding.txt | ||
8 | - how to decode the bits of an IOCTL code | ||
9 | ioctl-number.txt | ||
10 | - how to implement and register device/driver ioctl calls | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index b880ce5dbd33..b880ce5dbd33 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/CREDITS b/Documentation/isdn/CREDITS index 8cac6c2f23ee..c1679e913fca 100644 --- a/Documentation/isdn/CREDITS +++ b/Documentation/isdn/CREDITS | |||
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ I want to thank all who contributed to this project and especially to: | |||
5 | Thomas Bogendörfer (tsbogend@bigbug.franken.de) | 5 | Thomas Bogendörfer (tsbogend@bigbug.franken.de) |
6 | Tester, lots of bugfixes and hints. | 6 | Tester, lots of bugfixes and hints. |
7 | 7 | ||
8 | Alan Cox (alan@redhat.com) | 8 | Alan Cox (alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk) |
9 | For help getting into standard-kernel. | 9 | For help getting into standard-kernel. |
10 | 10 | ||
11 | Henner Eisen (eis@baty.hanse.de) | 11 | Henner Eisen (eis@baty.hanse.de) |
diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO index 0775cf4798b2..55476982b5ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO | |||
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a | |||
11 | fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try | 11 | fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try |
12 | to update the original English file first. | 12 | to update the original English file first. |
13 | 13 | ||
14 | Last Updated: 2008/08/21 | 14 | Last Updated: 2008/10/24 |
15 | ================================== | 15 | ================================== |
16 | ã“ã‚Œã¯ã€ | 16 | ã“ã‚Œã¯ã€ |
17 | linux-2.6.27/Documentation/HOWTO | 17 | linux-2.6.28/Documentation/HOWTO |
18 | ã®å’Œè¨³ã§ã™ã€‚ | 18 | ã®å’Œè¨³ã§ã™ã€‚ |
19 | 19 | ||
20 | 翻訳団体: JF プãƒã‚¸ã‚§ã‚¯ãƒˆ < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > | 20 | 翻訳団体: JF プãƒã‚¸ã‚§ã‚¯ãƒˆ < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > |
21 | 翻訳日: 2008/8/5 | 21 | 翻訳日: 2008/10/24 |
22 | 翻訳者: Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com> | 22 | 翻訳者: Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com> |
23 | æ ¡æ£è€…: æ¾å€‰ã•ã‚“ <nbh--mats at nifty dot com> | 23 | æ ¡æ£è€…: æ¾å€‰ã•ã‚“ <nbh--mats at nifty dot com> |
24 | å°æž— é›…å…¸ã•ã‚“ (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> | 24 | å°æž— é›…å…¸ã•ã‚“ (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> |
@@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ Linux カーãƒãƒ«ã‚½ãƒ¼ã‚¹ãƒ„リーã¯å¹…広ã„範囲ã®ãƒ‰ã‚ュメントをå | |||
110 | æ–°ã—ã„ドã‚ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆãƒ•ã‚¡ã‚¤ãƒ«ã‚‚è¿½åŠ ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’勧ã‚ã¾ã™ã€‚ | 110 | æ–°ã—ã„ドã‚ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆãƒ•ã‚¡ã‚¤ãƒ«ã‚‚è¿½åŠ ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’勧ã‚ã¾ã™ã€‚ |
111 | カーãƒãƒ«ã®å¤‰æ›´ãŒã€ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãŒãƒ¦ãƒ¼ã‚¶ç©ºé–“ã«å…¬é–‹ã—ã¦ã„るインターフェイス㮠| 111 | カーãƒãƒ«ã®å¤‰æ›´ãŒã€ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãŒãƒ¦ãƒ¼ã‚¶ç©ºé–“ã«å…¬é–‹ã—ã¦ã„るインターフェイス㮠|
112 | 変更を引ãèµ·ã“ã™å ´åˆã€ãã®å¤‰æ›´ã‚’説明ã™ã‚‹ãƒžãƒ‹ãƒ¥ã‚¢ãƒ«ãƒšãƒ¼ã‚¸ã®ãƒ‘ッãƒã‚„æƒ…å ± | 112 | 変更を引ãèµ·ã“ã™å ´åˆã€ãã®å¤‰æ›´ã‚’説明ã™ã‚‹ãƒžãƒ‹ãƒ¥ã‚¢ãƒ«ãƒšãƒ¼ã‚¸ã®ãƒ‘ッãƒã‚„æƒ…å ± |
113 | をマニュアルページã®ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒ†ãƒŠ mtk.manpages@gmail.com ã«é€ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’勧ã‚ã¾ | 113 | をマニュアルページã®ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒ†ãƒŠ mtk.manpages@gmail.com ã«é€ã‚Šã€CC ã‚’ |
114 | ã™ã€‚ | 114 | linux-api@ver.kernel.org ã«é€ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’勧ã‚ã¾ã™ã€‚ |
115 | 115 | ||
116 | 以下ã¯ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã‚½ãƒ¼ã‚¹ãƒ„リーã«å«ã¾ã‚Œã¦ã„ã‚‹èªã‚“ã§ãŠãã¹ãファイルã®ä¸€è¦§ã§ | 116 | 以下ã¯ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã‚½ãƒ¼ã‚¹ãƒ„リーã«å«ã¾ã‚Œã¦ã„ã‚‹èªã‚“ã§ãŠãã¹ãファイルã®ä¸€è¦§ã§ |
117 | ã™- | 117 | ã™- |
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Linux カーãƒãƒ«ã‚½ãƒ¼ã‚¹ãƒ„リーã¯å¹…広ã„範囲ã®ãƒ‰ã‚ュメントをå | |||
149 | ã“ã®ä»–ã«ãƒ‘ッãƒã‚’作る方法ã«ã¤ã„ã¦ã®ã‚ˆãã§ããŸè¨˜è¿°ã¯- | 149 | ã“ã®ä»–ã«ãƒ‘ッãƒã‚’作る方法ã«ã¤ã„ã¦ã®ã‚ˆãã§ããŸè¨˜è¿°ã¯- |
150 | 150 | ||
151 | "The Perfect Patch" | 151 | "The Perfect Patch" |
152 | http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt | 152 | http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt |
153 | "Linux kernel patch submission format" | 153 | "Linux kernel patch submission format" |
154 | http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html | 154 | http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html |
155 | 155 | ||
@@ -664,7 +664,7 @@ Linux カーãƒãƒ«ã‚³ãƒŸãƒ¥ãƒ‹ãƒ†ã‚£ã¯ã€ä¸€åº¦ã«å¤§é‡ã®ã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ã®å¡Šã‚’å– | |||
664 | ã“ã‚Œã«ã¤ã„ã¦å…¨ã¦ãŒã©ã®ã‚ˆã†ã«ã‚ã‚‹ã¹ãã‹ã«ã¤ã„ã¦ã®è©³ç´°ã¯ã€ä»¥ä¸‹ã®ãƒ‰ã‚ュメ | 664 | ã“ã‚Œã«ã¤ã„ã¦å…¨ã¦ãŒã©ã®ã‚ˆã†ã«ã‚ã‚‹ã¹ãã‹ã«ã¤ã„ã¦ã®è©³ç´°ã¯ã€ä»¥ä¸‹ã®ãƒ‰ã‚ュメ |
665 | ント㮠ChangeLog セクションを見ã¦ãã ã•ã„- | 665 | ント㮠ChangeLog セクションを見ã¦ãã ã•ã„- |
666 | "The Perfect Patch" | 666 | "The Perfect Patch" |
667 | http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt | 667 | http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt |
668 | 668 | ||
669 | ã“れらã®ã©ã‚Œã‚‚ãŒã€æ™‚ã«ã¯ã¨ã¦ã‚‚困難ã§ã™ã€‚ã“れらã®æ…£ä¾‹ã‚’完璧ã«å®Ÿæ–½ã™ã‚‹ã« | 669 | ã“れらã®ã©ã‚Œã‚‚ãŒã€æ™‚ã«ã¯ã¨ã¦ã‚‚困難ã§ã™ã€‚ã“れらã®æ…£ä¾‹ã‚’完璧ã«å®Ÿæ–½ã™ã‚‹ã« |
670 | ã¯æ•°å¹´ã‹ã‹ã‚‹ã‹ã‚‚ã—ã‚Œã¾ã›ã‚“。ã“ã‚Œã¯ç¶™ç¶šçš„ãªæ”¹å–„ã®ãƒ—ãƒã‚»ã‚¹ã§ã‚ã‚Šã€ãã®ãŸ | 670 | ã¯æ•°å¹´ã‹ã‹ã‚‹ã‹ã‚‚ã—ã‚Œã¾ã›ã‚“。ã“ã‚Œã¯ç¶™ç¶šçš„ãªæ”¹å–„ã®ãƒ—ãƒã‚»ã‚¹ã§ã‚ã‚Šã€ãã®ãŸ |
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt index 0705040531a5..3f4bc840da8b 100644 --- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt | |||
@@ -109,7 +109,8 @@ There are two possible methods of using Kdump. | |||
109 | 2) Or use the system kernel binary itself as dump-capture kernel and there is | 109 | 2) Or use the system kernel binary itself as dump-capture kernel and there is |
110 | no need to build a separate dump-capture kernel. This is possible | 110 | no need to build a separate dump-capture kernel. This is possible |
111 | only with the architecutres which support a relocatable kernel. As | 111 | only with the architecutres which support a relocatable kernel. As |
112 | of today, i386, x86_64 and ia64 architectures support relocatable kernel. | 112 | of today, i386, x86_64, ppc64 and ia64 architectures support relocatable |
113 | kernel. | ||
113 | 114 | ||
114 | Building a relocatable kernel is advantageous from the point of view that | 115 | Building a relocatable kernel is advantageous from the point of view that |
115 | one does not have to build a second kernel for capturing the dump. But | 116 | one does not have to build a second kernel for capturing the dump. But |
@@ -207,8 +208,15 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, i386 and x86_64) | |||
207 | Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ppc64) | 208 | Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ppc64) |
208 | ---------------------------------------------------------- | 209 | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
209 | 210 | ||
210 | * Make and install the kernel and its modules. DO NOT add this kernel | 211 | 1) Enable "Build a kdump crash kernel" support under "Kernel" options: |
211 | to the boot loader configuration files. | 212 | |
213 | CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y | ||
214 | |||
215 | 2) Enable "Build a relocatable kernel" support | ||
216 | |||
217 | CONFIG_RELOCATABLE=y | ||
218 | |||
219 | Make and install the kernel and its modules. | ||
212 | 220 | ||
213 | Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ia64) | 221 | Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ia64) |
214 | ---------------------------------------------------------- | 222 | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 53ba7c7d82b3..d5418d528910 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | |||
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ parameter is applicable: | |||
100 | X86-32 X86-32, aka i386 architecture is enabled. | 100 | X86-32 X86-32, aka i386 architecture is enabled. |
101 | X86-64 X86-64 architecture is enabled. | 101 | X86-64 X86-64 architecture is enabled. |
102 | More X86-64 boot options can be found in | 102 | More X86-64 boot options can be found in |
103 | Documentation/x86_64/boot-options.txt . | 103 | Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt . |
104 | X86 Either 32bit or 64bit x86 (same as X86-32+X86-64) | 104 | X86 Either 32bit or 64bit x86 (same as X86-32+X86-64) |
105 | 105 | ||
106 | In addition, the following text indicates that the option: | 106 | In addition, the following text indicates that the option: |
@@ -112,10 +112,10 @@ In addition, the following text indicates that the option: | |||
112 | Parameters denoted with BOOT are actually interpreted by the boot | 112 | Parameters denoted with BOOT are actually interpreted by the boot |
113 | loader, and have no meaning to the kernel directly. | 113 | loader, and have no meaning to the kernel directly. |
114 | Do not modify the syntax of boot loader parameters without extreme | 114 | Do not modify the syntax of boot loader parameters without extreme |
115 | need or coordination with <Documentation/i386/boot.txt>. | 115 | need or coordination with <Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt>. |
116 | 116 | ||
117 | There are also arch-specific kernel-parameters not documented here. | 117 | There are also arch-specific kernel-parameters not documented here. |
118 | See for example <Documentation/x86_64/boot-options.txt>. | 118 | See for example <Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt>. |
119 | 119 | ||
120 | Note that ALL kernel parameters listed below are CASE SENSITIVE, and that | 120 | Note that ALL kernel parameters listed below are CASE SENSITIVE, and that |
121 | a trailing = on the name of any parameter states that that parameter will | 121 | a trailing = on the name of any parameter states that that parameter will |
@@ -198,40 +198,50 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
198 | that require a timer override, but don't have | 198 | that require a timer override, but don't have |
199 | HPET | 199 | HPET |
200 | 200 | ||
201 | acpi.debug_layer= [HW,ACPI] | 201 | acpi_backlight= [HW,ACPI] |
202 | Format: <int> | 202 | acpi_backlight=vendor |
203 | Each bit of the <int> indicates an ACPI debug layer, | 203 | acpi_backlight=video |
204 | 1: enable, 0: disable. It is useful for boot time | 204 | If set to vendor, prefer vendor specific driver |
205 | debugging. After system has booted up, it can be set | 205 | (e.g. thinkpad_acpi, sony_acpi, etc.) instead |
206 | via /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer. | 206 | of the ACPI video.ko driver. |
207 | CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG must be enabled for this to produce any output. | 207 | |
208 | Available bits (add the numbers together) to enable debug output | 208 | acpi_display_output= [HW,ACPI] |
209 | for specific parts of the ACPI subsystem: | 209 | acpi_display_output=vendor |
210 | 0x01 utilities 0x02 hardware 0x04 events 0x08 tables | 210 | acpi_display_output=video |
211 | 0x10 namespace 0x20 parser 0x40 dispatcher | 211 | See above. |
212 | 0x80 executer 0x100 resources 0x200 acpica debugger | 212 | |
213 | 0x400 os services 0x800 acpica disassembler. | 213 | acpi.debug_layer= [HW,ACPI,ACPI_DEBUG] |
214 | The number can be in decimal or prefixed with 0x in hex. | 214 | acpi.debug_level= [HW,ACPI,ACPI_DEBUG] |
215 | Warning: Many of these options can produce a lot of | ||
216 | output and make your system unusable. Be very careful. | ||
217 | |||
218 | acpi.debug_level= [HW,ACPI] | ||
219 | Format: <int> | 215 | Format: <int> |
220 | Each bit of the <int> indicates an ACPI debug level, | 216 | CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG must be enabled to produce any ACPI |
221 | 1: enable, 0: disable. It is useful for boot time | 217 | debug output. Bits in debug_layer correspond to a |
222 | debugging. After system has booted up, it can be set | 218 | _COMPONENT in an ACPI source file, e.g., |
223 | via /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level. | 219 | #define _COMPONENT ACPI_PCI_COMPONENT |
224 | CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG must be enabled for this to produce any output. | 220 | Bits in debug_level correspond to a level in |
225 | Available bits (add the numbers together) to enable different | 221 | ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT statements, e.g., |
226 | debug output levels of the ACPI subsystem: | 222 | ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT((ACPI_DB_INFO, ... |
227 | 0x01 error 0x02 warn 0x04 init 0x08 debug object | 223 | See Documentation/acpi/debug.txt for more information |
228 | 0x10 info 0x20 init names 0x40 parse 0x80 load | 224 | about debug layers and levels. |
229 | 0x100 dispatch 0x200 execute 0x400 names 0x800 operation region | 225 | |
230 | 0x1000 bfield 0x2000 tables 0x4000 values 0x8000 objects | 226 | Enable AML "Debug" output, i.e., stores to the Debug |
231 | 0x10000 resources 0x20000 user requests 0x40000 package. | 227 | object while interpreting AML: |
232 | The number can be in decimal or prefixed with 0x in hex. | 228 | acpi.debug_layer=0xffffffff acpi.debug_level=0x2 |
233 | Warning: Many of these options can produce a lot of | 229 | Enable PCI/PCI interrupt routing info messages: |
234 | output and make your system unusable. Be very careful. | 230 | acpi.debug_layer=0x400000 acpi.debug_level=0x4 |
231 | Enable all messages related to ACPI hardware: | ||
232 | acpi.debug_layer=0x2 acpi.debug_level=0xffffffff | ||
233 | |||
234 | Some values produce so much output that the system is | ||
235 | unusable. The "log_buf_len" parameter may be useful | ||
236 | if you need to capture more output. | ||
237 | |||
238 | acpi.power_nocheck= [HW,ACPI] | ||
239 | Format: 1/0 enable/disable the check of power state. | ||
240 | On some bogus BIOS the _PSC object/_STA object of | ||
241 | power resource can't return the correct device power | ||
242 | state. In such case it is unneccessary to check its | ||
243 | power state again in power transition. | ||
244 | 1 : disable the power state check | ||
235 | 245 | ||
236 | acpi_pm_good [X86-32,X86-64] | 246 | acpi_pm_good [X86-32,X86-64] |
237 | Override the pmtimer bug detection: force the kernel | 247 | Override the pmtimer bug detection: force the kernel |
@@ -284,7 +294,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
284 | Possible values are: | 294 | Possible values are: |
285 | isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far | 295 | isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far |
286 | as possible, will get its own protection | 296 | as possible, will get its own protection |
287 | domain) | 297 | domain) [default] |
298 | share - put every device behind one IOMMU into the | ||
299 | same protection domain | ||
288 | fullflush - enable flushing of IO/TLB entries when | 300 | fullflush - enable flushing of IO/TLB entries when |
289 | they are unmapped. Otherwise they are | 301 | they are unmapped. Otherwise they are |
290 | flushed before they will be reused, which | 302 | flushed before they will be reused, which |
@@ -619,7 +631,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
619 | 631 | ||
620 | digiepca= [HW,SERIAL] | 632 | digiepca= [HW,SERIAL] |
621 | See drivers/char/README.epca and | 633 | See drivers/char/README.epca and |
622 | Documentation/digiepca.txt. | 634 | Documentation/serial/digiepca.txt. |
623 | 635 | ||
624 | disable_mtrr_cleanup [X86] | 636 | disable_mtrr_cleanup [X86] |
625 | enable_mtrr_cleanup [X86] | 637 | enable_mtrr_cleanup [X86] |
@@ -730,7 +742,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
730 | See header of drivers/scsi/fdomain.c. | 742 | See header of drivers/scsi/fdomain.c. |
731 | 743 | ||
732 | floppy= [HW] | 744 | floppy= [HW] |
733 | See Documentation/floppy.txt. | 745 | See Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt. |
734 | 746 | ||
735 | force_pal_cache_flush | 747 | force_pal_cache_flush |
736 | [IA-64] Avoid check_sal_cache_flush which may hang on | 748 | [IA-64] Avoid check_sal_cache_flush which may hang on |
@@ -968,13 +980,15 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
968 | Format: | 980 | Format: |
969 | <cpu number>,...,<cpu number> | 981 | <cpu number>,...,<cpu number> |
970 | or | 982 | or |
971 | <cpu number>-<cpu number> (must be a positive range in ascending order) | 983 | <cpu number>-<cpu number> |
984 | (must be a positive range in ascending order) | ||
972 | or a mixture | 985 | or a mixture |
973 | <cpu number>,...,<cpu number>-<cpu number> | 986 | <cpu number>,...,<cpu number>-<cpu number> |
987 | |||
974 | This option can be used to specify one or more CPUs | 988 | This option can be used to specify one or more CPUs |
975 | to isolate from the general SMP balancing and scheduling | 989 | to isolate from the general SMP balancing and scheduling |
976 | algorithms. The only way to move a process onto or off | 990 | algorithms. You can move a process onto or off an |
977 | an "isolated" CPU is via the CPU affinity syscalls. | 991 | "isolated" CPU via the CPU affinity syscalls or cpuset. |
978 | <cpu number> begins at 0 and the maximum value is | 992 | <cpu number> begins at 0 and the maximum value is |
979 | "number of CPUs in system - 1". | 993 | "number of CPUs in system - 1". |
980 | 994 | ||
@@ -1089,7 +1103,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1089 | the same attribute, the last one is used. | 1103 | the same attribute, the last one is used. |
1090 | 1104 | ||
1091 | load_ramdisk= [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy | 1105 | load_ramdisk= [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy |
1092 | See Documentation/ramdisk.txt. | 1106 | See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt. |
1093 | 1107 | ||
1094 | lockd.nlm_grace_period=P [NFS] Assign grace period. | 1108 | lockd.nlm_grace_period=P [NFS] Assign grace period. |
1095 | Format: <integer> | 1109 | Format: <integer> |
@@ -1181,8 +1195,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1181 | it is equivalent to "nosmp", which also disables | 1195 | it is equivalent to "nosmp", which also disables |
1182 | the IO APIC. | 1196 | the IO APIC. |
1183 | 1197 | ||
1184 | max_addr=[KMG] [KNL,BOOT,ia64] All physical memory greater than or | 1198 | max_addr=nn[KMG] [KNL,BOOT,ia64] All physical memory greater than |
1185 | equal to this physical address is ignored. | 1199 | or equal to this physical address is ignored. |
1186 | 1200 | ||
1187 | max_luns= [SCSI] Maximum number of LUNs to probe. | 1201 | max_luns= [SCSI] Maximum number of LUNs to probe. |
1188 | Should be between 1 and 2^32-1. | 1202 | Should be between 1 and 2^32-1. |
@@ -1195,7 +1209,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1195 | 1209 | ||
1196 | mce [X86-32] Machine Check Exception | 1210 | mce [X86-32] Machine Check Exception |
1197 | 1211 | ||
1198 | mce=option [X86-64] See Documentation/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 1212 | mce=option [X86-64] See Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt |
1199 | 1213 | ||
1200 | md= [HW] RAID subsystems devices and level | 1214 | md= [HW] RAID subsystems devices and level |
1201 | See Documentation/md.txt. | 1215 | See Documentation/md.txt. |
@@ -1282,6 +1296,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1282 | 1296 | ||
1283 | mga= [HW,DRM] | 1297 | mga= [HW,DRM] |
1284 | 1298 | ||
1299 | min_addr=nn[KMG] [KNL,BOOT,ia64] All physical memory below this | ||
1300 | physical address is ignored. | ||
1301 | |||
1285 | mminit_loglevel= | 1302 | mminit_loglevel= |
1286 | [KNL] When CONFIG_DEBUG_MEMORY_INIT is set, this | 1303 | [KNL] When CONFIG_DEBUG_MEMORY_INIT is set, this |
1287 | parameter allows control of the logging verbosity for | 1304 | parameter allows control of the logging verbosity for |
@@ -1376,7 +1393,20 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1376 | when a NMI is triggered. | 1393 | when a NMI is triggered. |
1377 | Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die] | 1394 | Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die] |
1378 | 1395 | ||
1379 | nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86-32] Debugging features for SMP kernels | 1396 | nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86-32,X86-64] Debugging features for SMP kernels |
1397 | Format: [panic,][num] | ||
1398 | Valid num: 0,1,2 | ||
1399 | 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off | ||
1400 | 1 - use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog | ||
1401 | 2 - use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using | ||
1402 | a performance counter. Note: This will use one performance | ||
1403 | counter and the local APIC's performance vector. | ||
1404 | When panic is specified panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs. | ||
1405 | This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box | ||
1406 | quickly up again. | ||
1407 | Instead of 1 and 2 it is possible to use the following | ||
1408 | symbolic names: lapic and ioapic | ||
1409 | Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic | ||
1380 | 1410 | ||
1381 | no387 [BUGS=X86-32] Tells the kernel to use the 387 maths | 1411 | no387 [BUGS=X86-32] Tells the kernel to use the 387 maths |
1382 | emulation library even if a 387 maths coprocessor | 1412 | emulation library even if a 387 maths coprocessor |
@@ -1443,8 +1473,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1443 | Valid arguments: on, off | 1473 | Valid arguments: on, off |
1444 | Default: on | 1474 | Default: on |
1445 | 1475 | ||
1446 | noirqbalance [X86-32,SMP,KNL] Disable kernel irq balancing | ||
1447 | |||
1448 | noirqdebug [X86-32] Disables the code which attempts to detect and | 1476 | noirqdebug [X86-32] Disables the code which attempts to detect and |
1449 | disable unhandled interrupt sources. | 1477 | disable unhandled interrupt sources. |
1450 | 1478 | ||
@@ -1586,7 +1614,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1586 | 1614 | ||
1587 | pcd. [PARIDE] | 1615 | pcd. [PARIDE] |
1588 | See header of drivers/block/paride/pcd.c. | 1616 | See header of drivers/block/paride/pcd.c. |
1589 | See also Documentation/paride.txt. | 1617 | See also Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt. |
1590 | 1618 | ||
1591 | pci=option[,option...] [PCI] various PCI subsystem options: | 1619 | pci=option[,option...] [PCI] various PCI subsystem options: |
1592 | off [X86] don't probe for the PCI bus | 1620 | off [X86] don't probe for the PCI bus |
@@ -1611,6 +1639,17 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1611 | nomsi [MSI] If the PCI_MSI kernel config parameter is | 1639 | nomsi [MSI] If the PCI_MSI kernel config parameter is |
1612 | enabled, this kernel boot option can be used to | 1640 | enabled, this kernel boot option can be used to |
1613 | disable the use of MSI interrupts system-wide. | 1641 | disable the use of MSI interrupts system-wide. |
1642 | noioapicquirk [APIC] Disable all boot interrupt quirks. | ||
1643 | Safety option to keep boot IRQs enabled. This | ||
1644 | should never be necessary. | ||
1645 | ioapicreroute [APIC] Enable rerouting of boot IRQs to the | ||
1646 | primary IO-APIC for bridges that cannot disable | ||
1647 | boot IRQs. This fixes a source of spurious IRQs | ||
1648 | when the system masks IRQs. | ||
1649 | noioapicreroute [APIC] Disable workaround that uses the | ||
1650 | boot IRQ equivalent of an IRQ that connects to | ||
1651 | a chipset where boot IRQs cannot be disabled. | ||
1652 | The opposite of ioapicreroute. | ||
1614 | biosirq [X86-32] Use PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt | 1653 | biosirq [X86-32] Use PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt |
1615 | routing table. These calls are known to be buggy | 1654 | routing table. These calls are known to be buggy |
1616 | on several machines and they hang the machine | 1655 | on several machines and they hang the machine |
@@ -1687,7 +1726,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1687 | pcmv= [HW,PCMCIA] BadgePAD 4 | 1726 | pcmv= [HW,PCMCIA] BadgePAD 4 |
1688 | 1727 | ||
1689 | pd. [PARIDE] | 1728 | pd. [PARIDE] |
1690 | See Documentation/paride.txt. | 1729 | See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt. |
1691 | 1730 | ||
1692 | pdcchassis= [PARISC,HW] Disable/Enable PDC Chassis Status codes at | 1731 | pdcchassis= [PARISC,HW] Disable/Enable PDC Chassis Status codes at |
1693 | boot time. | 1732 | boot time. |
@@ -1695,13 +1734,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1695 | See arch/parisc/kernel/pdc_chassis.c | 1734 | See arch/parisc/kernel/pdc_chassis.c |
1696 | 1735 | ||
1697 | pf. [PARIDE] | 1736 | pf. [PARIDE] |
1698 | See Documentation/paride.txt. | 1737 | See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt. |
1699 | 1738 | ||
1700 | pg. [PARIDE] | 1739 | pg. [PARIDE] |
1701 | See Documentation/paride.txt. | 1740 | See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt. |
1702 | 1741 | ||
1703 | pirq= [SMP,APIC] Manual mp-table setup | 1742 | pirq= [SMP,APIC] Manual mp-table setup |
1704 | See Documentation/i386/IO-APIC.txt. | 1743 | See Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt. |
1705 | 1744 | ||
1706 | plip= [PPT,NET] Parallel port network link | 1745 | plip= [PPT,NET] Parallel port network link |
1707 | Format: { parport<nr> | timid | 0 } | 1746 | Format: { parport<nr> | timid | 0 } |
@@ -1711,6 +1750,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1711 | Override pmtimer IOPort with a hex value. | 1750 | Override pmtimer IOPort with a hex value. |
1712 | e.g. pmtmr=0x508 | 1751 | e.g. pmtmr=0x508 |
1713 | 1752 | ||
1753 | pnp.debug [PNP] | ||
1754 | Enable PNP debug messages. This depends on the | ||
1755 | CONFIG_PNP_DEBUG_MESSAGES option. | ||
1756 | |||
1714 | pnpacpi= [ACPI] | 1757 | pnpacpi= [ACPI] |
1715 | { off } | 1758 | { off } |
1716 | 1759 | ||
@@ -1764,7 +1807,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1764 | 1807 | ||
1765 | prompt_ramdisk= [RAM] List of RAM disks to prompt for floppy disk | 1808 | prompt_ramdisk= [RAM] List of RAM disks to prompt for floppy disk |
1766 | before loading. | 1809 | before loading. |
1767 | See Documentation/ramdisk.txt. | 1810 | See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt. |
1768 | 1811 | ||
1769 | psmouse.proto= [HW,MOUSE] Highest PS2 mouse protocol extension to | 1812 | psmouse.proto= [HW,MOUSE] Highest PS2 mouse protocol extension to |
1770 | probe for; one of (bare|imps|exps|lifebook|any). | 1813 | probe for; one of (bare|imps|exps|lifebook|any). |
@@ -1784,7 +1827,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1784 | <io>,<mss_io>,<mss_irq>,<mss_dma>,<mpu_io>,<mpu_irq> | 1827 | <io>,<mss_io>,<mss_irq>,<mss_dma>,<mpu_io>,<mpu_irq> |
1785 | 1828 | ||
1786 | pt. [PARIDE] | 1829 | pt. [PARIDE] |
1787 | See Documentation/paride.txt. | 1830 | See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt. |
1788 | 1831 | ||
1789 | pty.legacy_count= | 1832 | pty.legacy_count= |
1790 | [KNL] Number of legacy pty's. Overwrites compiled-in | 1833 | [KNL] Number of legacy pty's. Overwrites compiled-in |
@@ -1798,10 +1841,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
1798 | See Documentation/md.txt. | 1841 | See Documentation/md.txt. |
1799 | 1842 | ||
1800 | ramdisk_blocksize= [RAM] | 1843 | ramdisk_blocksize= [RAM] |
1801 | See Documentation/ramdisk.txt. | 1844 | See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt. |
1802 | 1845 | ||
1803 | ramdisk_size= [RAM] Sizes of RAM disks in kilobytes | 1846 | ramdisk_size= [RAM] Sizes of RAM disks in kilobytes |
1804 | See Documentation/ramdisk.txt. | 1847 | See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt. |
1805 | 1848 | ||
1806 | rcupdate.blimit= [KNL,BOOT] | 1849 | rcupdate.blimit= [KNL,BOOT] |
1807 | Set maximum number of finished RCU callbacks to process | 1850 | Set maximum number of finished RCU callbacks to process |
@@ -2133,7 +2176,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
2133 | See Documentation/sonypi.txt | 2176 | See Documentation/sonypi.txt |
2134 | 2177 | ||
2135 | specialix= [HW,SERIAL] Specialix multi-serial port adapter | 2178 | specialix= [HW,SERIAL] Specialix multi-serial port adapter |
2136 | See Documentation/specialix.txt. | 2179 | See Documentation/serial/specialix.txt. |
2137 | 2180 | ||
2138 | spia_io_base= [HW,MTD] | 2181 | spia_io_base= [HW,MTD] |
2139 | spia_fio_base= | 2182 | spia_fio_base= |
@@ -2208,7 +2251,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
2208 | 2251 | ||
2209 | thermal.crt= [HW,ACPI] | 2252 | thermal.crt= [HW,ACPI] |
2210 | -1: disable all critical trip points in all thermal zones | 2253 | -1: disable all critical trip points in all thermal zones |
2211 | <degrees C>: lower all critical trip points | 2254 | <degrees C>: override all critical trip points |
2212 | 2255 | ||
2213 | thermal.nocrt= [HW,ACPI] | 2256 | thermal.nocrt= [HW,ACPI] |
2214 | Set to disable actions on ACPI thermal zone | 2257 | Set to disable actions on ACPI thermal zone |
@@ -2236,6 +2279,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
2236 | Format: | 2279 | Format: |
2237 | <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>,<sb_io>,<sb_irq>,<sb_dma>,<mpu_io>,<mpu_irq> | 2280 | <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>,<sb_io>,<sb_irq>,<sb_dma>,<mpu_io>,<mpu_irq> |
2238 | 2281 | ||
2282 | tsc= Disable clocksource-must-verify flag for TSC. | ||
2283 | Format: <string> | ||
2284 | [x86] reliable: mark tsc clocksource as reliable, this | ||
2285 | disables clocksource verification at runtime. | ||
2286 | Used to enable high-resolution timer mode on older | ||
2287 | hardware, and in virtualized environment. | ||
2288 | |||
2239 | turbografx.map[2|3]= [HW,JOY] | 2289 | turbografx.map[2|3]= [HW,JOY] |
2240 | TurboGraFX parallel port interface | 2290 | TurboGraFX parallel port interface |
2241 | Format: | 2291 | Format: |
@@ -2312,7 +2362,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file | |||
2312 | See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt. | 2362 | See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt. |
2313 | 2363 | ||
2314 | vga= [BOOT,X86-32] Select a particular video mode | 2364 | vga= [BOOT,X86-32] Select a particular video mode |
2315 | See Documentation/i386/boot.txt and | 2365 | See Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt and |
2316 | Documentation/svga.txt. | 2366 | Documentation/svga.txt. |
2317 | Use vga=ask for menu. | 2367 | Use vga=ask for menu. |
2318 | This is actually a boot loader parameter; the value is | 2368 | This is actually a boot loader parameter; the value is |
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt index 69b5dd4e5a59..2b3a6b5260bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt | |||
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ | |||
1 | Acer Laptop WMI Extras Driver | 1 | Acer Laptop WMI Extras Driver |
2 | http://code.google.com/p/aceracpi | 2 | http://code.google.com/p/aceracpi |
3 | Version 0.1 | 3 | Version 0.2 |
4 | 9th February 2008 | 4 | 18th August 2008 |
5 | 5 | ||
6 | Copyright 2007-2008 Carlos Corbacho <carlos@strangeworlds.co.uk> | 6 | Copyright 2007-2008 Carlos Corbacho <carlos@strangeworlds.co.uk> |
7 | 7 | ||
@@ -87,17 +87,7 @@ acer-wmi come with built-in wireless. However, should you feel so inclined to | |||
87 | ever wish to remove the card, or swap it out at some point, please get in touch | 87 | ever wish to remove the card, or swap it out at some point, please get in touch |
88 | with me, as we may well be able to gain some data on wireless card detection. | 88 | with me, as we may well be able to gain some data on wireless card detection. |
89 | 89 | ||
90 | To read the status of the wireless radio (0=off, 1=on): | 90 | The wireless radio is exposed through rfkill. |
91 | cat /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/wireless | ||
92 | |||
93 | To enable the wireless radio: | ||
94 | echo 1 > /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/wireless | ||
95 | |||
96 | To disable the wireless radio: | ||
97 | echo 0 > /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/wireless | ||
98 | |||
99 | To set the state of the wireless radio when loading acer-wmi, pass: | ||
100 | wireless=X (where X is 0 or 1) | ||
101 | 91 | ||
102 | Bluetooth | 92 | Bluetooth |
103 | ********* | 93 | ********* |
@@ -117,17 +107,7 @@ For the adventurously minded - if you want to buy an internal bluetooth | |||
117 | module off the internet that is compatible with your laptop and fit it, then | 107 | module off the internet that is compatible with your laptop and fit it, then |
118 | it will work just fine with acer-wmi. | 108 | it will work just fine with acer-wmi. |
119 | 109 | ||
120 | To read the status of the bluetooth module (0=off, 1=on): | 110 | Bluetooth is exposed through rfkill. |
121 | cat /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/wireless | ||
122 | |||
123 | To enable the bluetooth module: | ||
124 | echo 1 > /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/bluetooth | ||
125 | |||
126 | To disable the bluetooth module: | ||
127 | echo 0 > /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/bluetooth | ||
128 | |||
129 | To set the state of the bluetooth module when loading acer-wmi, pass: | ||
130 | bluetooth=X (where X is 0 or 1) | ||
131 | 111 | ||
132 | 3G | 112 | 3G |
133 | ** | 113 | ** |
diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile b/Documentation/lguest/Makefile index bac037eb1cda..725eef81cd48 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/lguest/Makefile | |||
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ | |||
1 | # This creates the demonstration utility "lguest" which runs a Linux guest. | 1 | # This creates the demonstration utility "lguest" which runs a Linux guest. |
2 | CFLAGS:=-Wall -Wmissing-declarations -Wmissing-prototypes -O3 -I../../include | 2 | CFLAGS:=-Wall -Wmissing-declarations -Wmissing-prototypes -O3 -I../../include -I../../arch/x86/include |
3 | LDLIBS:=-lz | 3 | LDLIBS:=-lz |
4 | 4 | ||
5 | all: lguest | 5 | all: lguest |
diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index 7228369d1014..804520633fcf 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c | |||
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ | |||
44 | #include "linux/virtio_console.h" | 44 | #include "linux/virtio_console.h" |
45 | #include "linux/virtio_rng.h" | 45 | #include "linux/virtio_rng.h" |
46 | #include "linux/virtio_ring.h" | 46 | #include "linux/virtio_ring.h" |
47 | #include "asm-x86/bootparam.h" | 47 | #include "asm/bootparam.h" |
48 | /*L:110 We can ignore the 39 include files we need for this program, but I do | 48 | /*L:110 We can ignore the 39 include files we need for this program, but I do |
49 | * want to draw attention to the use of kernel-style types. | 49 | * want to draw attention to the use of kernel-style types. |
50 | * | 50 | * |
@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ static unsigned long load_bzimage(int fd) | |||
402 | void *p = from_guest_phys(0x100000); | 402 | void *p = from_guest_phys(0x100000); |
403 | 403 | ||
404 | /* Go back to the start of the file and read the header. It should be | 404 | /* Go back to the start of the file and read the header. It should be |
405 | * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/i386/boot.txt) */ | 405 | * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt) */ |
406 | lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); | 406 | lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); |
407 | read(fd, &boot, sizeof(boot)); | 407 | read(fd, &boot, sizeof(boot)); |
408 | 408 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/local_ops.txt b/Documentation/local_ops.txt index f4f8b1c6c8ba..23045b8b50f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/local_ops.txt +++ b/Documentation/local_ops.txt | |||
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ static void do_test_timer(unsigned long data) | |||
149 | int cpu; | 149 | int cpu; |
150 | 150 | ||
151 | /* Increment the counters */ | 151 | /* Increment the counters */ |
152 | on_each_cpu(test_each, NULL, 0, 1); | 152 | on_each_cpu(test_each, NULL, 1); |
153 | /* Read all the counters */ | 153 | /* Read all the counters */ |
154 | printk("Counters read from CPU %d\n", smp_processor_id()); | 154 | printk("Counters read from CPU %d\n", smp_processor_id()); |
155 | for_each_online_cpu(cpu) { | 155 | for_each_online_cpu(cpu) { |
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/.gitignore b/Documentation/networking/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..286a5680f490 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
ifenslave | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt index b1b7499dd9d3..8006c227fda2 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt | |||
@@ -60,6 +60,6 @@ Tobias Ringstrom <tori@unhappy.mine.nu> : Current Maintainer | |||
60 | Contributors: | 60 | Contributors: |
61 | 61 | ||
62 | Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br> | 62 | Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br> |
63 | Alan Cox <alan@redhat.com> | 63 | Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk> |
64 | Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> | 64 | Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> |
65 | Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> | 65 | Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> |
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt index 8df6a7b0e66c..88bb71b46da4 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt | |||
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Letting the PHY Abstraction Layer do Everything | |||
96 | static void adjust_link(struct net_device *dev); | 96 | static void adjust_link(struct net_device *dev); |
97 | 97 | ||
98 | Next, you need to know the device name of the PHY connected to this device. | 98 | Next, you need to know the device name of the PHY connected to this device. |
99 | The name will look something like, "phy0:0", where the first number is the | 99 | The name will look something like, "0:00", where the first number is the |
100 | bus id, and the second is the PHY's address on that bus. Typically, | 100 | bus id, and the second is the PHY's address on that bus. Typically, |
101 | the bus is responsible for making its ID unique. | 101 | the bus is responsible for making its ID unique. |
102 | 102 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt b/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt index 90aa4531cb67..bf9f80a98282 100644 --- a/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt +++ b/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt | |||
@@ -69,6 +69,11 @@ to the overall system performance. | |||
69 | On x86 nmi_watchdog is disabled by default so you have to enable it with | 69 | On x86 nmi_watchdog is disabled by default so you have to enable it with |
70 | a boot time parameter. | 70 | a boot time parameter. |
71 | 71 | ||
72 | It's possible to disable the NMI watchdog in run-time by writing "0" to | ||
73 | /proc/sys/kernel/nmi_watchdog. Writing "1" to the same file will re-enable | ||
74 | the NMI watchdog. Notice that you still need to use "nmi_watchdog=" parameter | ||
75 | at boot time. | ||
76 | |||
72 | NOTE: In kernels prior to 2.4.2-ac18 the NMI-oopser is enabled unconditionally | 77 | NOTE: In kernels prior to 2.4.2-ac18 the NMI-oopser is enabled unconditionally |
73 | on x86 SMP boxes. | 78 | on x86 SMP boxes. |
74 | 79 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/.gitignore b/Documentation/pcmcia/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..53d081336757 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
crc32hash | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt index de4063cb4fdc..0ab0230cbcb0 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt | |||
@@ -41,25 +41,14 @@ Table of Contents | |||
41 | VI - System-on-a-chip devices and nodes | 41 | VI - System-on-a-chip devices and nodes |
42 | 1) Defining child nodes of an SOC | 42 | 1) Defining child nodes of an SOC |
43 | 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification | 43 | 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification |
44 | a) MDIO IO device | 44 | a) PHY nodes |
45 | b) Gianfar-compatible ethernet nodes | 45 | b) Interrupt controllers |
46 | c) PHY nodes | 46 | c) CFI or JEDEC memory-mapped NOR flash |
47 | d) Interrupt controllers | 47 | d) 4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes |
48 | e) I2C | 48 | e) Xilinx IP cores |
49 | f) Freescale SOC USB controllers | 49 | f) USB EHCI controllers |
50 | g) Freescale SOC SEC Security Engines | 50 | g) MDIO on GPIOs |
51 | h) Board Control and Status (BCSR) | 51 | h) SPI busses |
52 | i) Freescale QUICC Engine module (QE) | ||
53 | j) CFI or JEDEC memory-mapped NOR flash | ||
54 | k) Global Utilities Block | ||
55 | l) Freescale Communications Processor Module | ||
56 | m) Chipselect/Local Bus | ||
57 | n) 4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes | ||
58 | o) Xilinx IP cores | ||
59 | p) Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface | ||
60 | q) USB EHCI controllers | ||
61 | r) MDIO on GPIOs | ||
62 | s) SPI busses | ||
63 | 52 | ||
64 | VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips | 53 | VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips |
65 | 1) The /system-controller node | 54 | 1) The /system-controller node |
@@ -1830,41 +1819,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. | |||
1830 | big-endian; | 1819 | big-endian; |
1831 | }; | 1820 | }; |
1832 | 1821 | ||
1833 | r) Freescale Display Interface Unit | 1822 | g) MDIO on GPIOs |
1834 | |||
1835 | The Freescale DIU is a LCD controller, with proper hardware, it can also | ||
1836 | drive DVI monitors. | ||
1837 | |||
1838 | Required properties: | ||
1839 | - compatible : should be "fsl-diu". | ||
1840 | - reg : should contain at least address and length of the DIU register | ||
1841 | set. | ||
1842 | - Interrupts : one DIU interrupt should be describe here. | ||
1843 | |||
1844 | Example (MPC8610HPCD) | ||
1845 | display@2c000 { | ||
1846 | compatible = "fsl,diu"; | ||
1847 | reg = <0x2c000 100>; | ||
1848 | interrupts = <72 2>; | ||
1849 | interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; | ||
1850 | }; | ||
1851 | |||
1852 | s) Freescale on board FPGA | ||
1853 | |||
1854 | This is the memory-mapped registers for on board FPGA. | ||
1855 | |||
1856 | Required properities: | ||
1857 | - compatible : should be "fsl,fpga-pixis". | ||
1858 | - reg : should contain the address and the lenght of the FPPGA register | ||
1859 | set. | ||
1860 | |||
1861 | Example (MPC8610HPCD) | ||
1862 | board-control@e8000000 { | ||
1863 | compatible = "fsl,fpga-pixis"; | ||
1864 | reg = <0xe8000000 32>; | ||
1865 | }; | ||
1866 | |||
1867 | r) MDIO on GPIOs | ||
1868 | 1823 | ||
1869 | Currently defined compatibles: | 1824 | Currently defined compatibles: |
1870 | - virtual,gpio-mdio | 1825 | - virtual,gpio-mdio |
@@ -1884,7 +1839,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. | |||
1884 | &qe_pio_c 6>; | 1839 | &qe_pio_c 6>; |
1885 | }; | 1840 | }; |
1886 | 1841 | ||
1887 | s) SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) busses | 1842 | h) SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) busses |
1888 | 1843 | ||
1889 | SPI busses can be described with a node for the SPI master device | 1844 | SPI busses can be described with a node for the SPI master device |
1890 | and a set of child nodes for each SPI slave on the bus. For this | 1845 | and a set of child nodes for each SPI slave on the bus. For this |
@@ -1917,6 +1872,8 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. | |||
1917 | inverse clock polarity (CPOL) mode | 1872 | inverse clock polarity (CPOL) mode |
1918 | - spi-cpha - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires | 1873 | - spi-cpha - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires |
1919 | shifted clock phase (CPHA) mode | 1874 | shifted clock phase (CPHA) mode |
1875 | - spi-cs-high - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires | ||
1876 | chip select active high | ||
1920 | 1877 | ||
1921 | SPI example for an MPC5200 SPI bus: | 1878 | SPI example for an MPC5200 SPI bus: |
1922 | spi@f00 { | 1879 | spi@f00 { |
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt index 74ae6f1cd2d6..81a917ef96e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt | |||
@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@ | |||
2 | 2 | ||
3 | Required properties: | 3 | Required properties: |
4 | 4 | ||
5 | - device_type : Should be "board-control" | 5 | - compatible : Should be "fsl,<board>-bcsr" |
6 | - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device | 6 | - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device |
7 | 7 | ||
8 | Example: | 8 | Example: |
9 | 9 | ||
10 | bcsr@f8000000 { | 10 | bcsr@f8000000 { |
11 | device_type = "board-control"; | 11 | compatible = "fsl,mpc8360mds-bcsr"; |
12 | reg = <f8000000 8000>; | 12 | reg = <f8000000 8000>; |
13 | }; | 13 | }; |
14 | 14 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/printk-formats.txt b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1b5a5ddbc3ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/printk-formats.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ | |||
1 | If variable is of Type, use printk format specifier: | ||
2 | --------------------------------------------------------- | ||
3 | int %d or %x | ||
4 | unsigned int %u or %x | ||
5 | long %ld or %lx | ||
6 | unsigned long %lu or %lx | ||
7 | long long %lld or %llx | ||
8 | unsigned long long %llu or %llx | ||
9 | size_t %zu or %zx | ||
10 | ssize_t %zd or %zx | ||
11 | |||
12 | Raw pointer value SHOULD be printed with %p. | ||
13 | |||
14 | u64 SHOULD be printed with %llu/%llx, (unsigned long long): | ||
15 | |||
16 | printk("%llu", (unsigned long long)u64_var); | ||
17 | |||
18 | s64 SHOULD be printed with %lld/%llx, (long long): | ||
19 | |||
20 | printk("%lld", (long long)s64_var); | ||
21 | |||
22 | If <type> is dependent on a config option for its size (e.g., sector_t, | ||
23 | blkcnt_t, phys_addr_t, resource_size_t) or is architecture-dependent | ||
24 | for its size (e.g., tcflag_t), use a format specifier of its largest | ||
25 | possible type and explicitly cast to it. Example: | ||
26 | |||
27 | printk("test: sector number/total blocks: %llu/%llu\n", | ||
28 | (unsigned long long)sector, (unsigned long long)blockcount); | ||
29 | |||
30 | Reminder: sizeof() result is of type size_t. | ||
31 | |||
32 | Thank you for your cooperation and attention. | ||
33 | |||
34 | |||
35 | By Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@xenotime.net> | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX index fc234d093fbf..aabcc3a089ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX | |||
@@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ sched-arch.txt | |||
4 | - CPU Scheduler implementation hints for architecture specific code. | 4 | - CPU Scheduler implementation hints for architecture specific code. |
5 | sched-coding.txt | 5 | sched-coding.txt |
6 | - reference for various scheduler-related methods in the O(1) scheduler. | 6 | - reference for various scheduler-related methods in the O(1) scheduler. |
7 | sched-design.txt | ||
8 | - goals, design and implementation of the Linux O(1) scheduler. | ||
9 | sched-design-CFS.txt | 7 | sched-design-CFS.txt |
10 | - goals, design and implementation of the Complete Fair Scheduler. | 8 | - goals, design and implementation of the Complete Fair Scheduler. |
11 | sched-domains.txt | 9 | sched-domains.txt |
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index 9d8eb553884c..eb471c7a905e 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | |||
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of "timeslices" in the | |||
92 | way the previous scheduler had, and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is | 92 | way the previous scheduler had, and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is |
93 | only one central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): | 93 | only one central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG): |
94 | 94 | ||
95 | /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns | 95 | /proc/sys/kernel/sched_min_granularity_ns |
96 | 96 | ||
97 | which can be used to tune the scheduler from "desktop" (i.e., low latencies) to | 97 | which can be used to tune the scheduler from "desktop" (i.e., low latencies) to |
98 | "server" (i.e., good batching) workloads. It defaults to a setting suitable | 98 | "server" (i.e., good batching) workloads. It defaults to a setting suitable |
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt index 709ca991a451..ddace3afc83b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt | |||
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Supported Cards/Chipsets | |||
128 | 128 | ||
129 | People | 129 | People |
130 | ------------------------- | 130 | ------------------------- |
131 | Alan Cox <alan@redhat.com> | 131 | Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk> |
132 | Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org> (updates for new-style PCI probing and SCSI host registration, | 132 | Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org> (updates for new-style PCI probing and SCSI host registration, |
133 | small cleanups/fixes) | 133 | small cleanups/fixes) |
134 | Matt Domsch <matt_domsch@dell.com> (revision ioctl, adapter messages) | 134 | Matt Domsch <matt_domsch@dell.com> (revision ioctl, adapter messages) |
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..07dcdb0d2a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ | |||
1 | 00-INDEX | ||
2 | - this file. | ||
3 | README.cycladesZ | ||
4 | - info on Cyclades-Z firmware loading. | ||
5 | computone.txt | ||
6 | - info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver. | ||
7 | digiepca.txt | ||
8 | - info on Digi Intl. {PC,PCI,EISA}Xx and Xem series cards. | ||
9 | hayes-esp.txt | ||
10 | - info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver. | ||
11 | moxa-smartio | ||
12 | - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver. | ||
13 | riscom8.txt | ||
14 | - notes on using the RISCom/8 multi-port serial driver. | ||
15 | rocket.txt | ||
16 | - info on the Comtrol RocketPort multiport serial driver. | ||
17 | specialix.txt | ||
18 | - info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card. | ||
19 | stallion.txt | ||
20 | - info on using the Stallion multiport serial driver. | ||
21 | sx.txt | ||
22 | - info on the Specialix SX/SI multiport serial driver. | ||
23 | tty.txt | ||
24 | - guide to the locking policies of the tty layer. | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/README.cycladesZ b/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ index 024a69443cc2..024a69443cc2 100644 --- a/Documentation/README.cycladesZ +++ b/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/computone.txt b/Documentation/serial/computone.txt index 5e2a0c76bfa0..c57ea4781e5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/computone.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/computone.txt | |||
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ shar archive to make it easier to extract the script from the documentation. | |||
247 | To create the ip2mkdev shell script change to a convenient directory (/tmp | 247 | To create the ip2mkdev shell script change to a convenient directory (/tmp |
248 | works just fine) and run the following command: | 248 | works just fine) and run the following command: |
249 | 249 | ||
250 | unshar Documentation/computone.txt | 250 | unshar Documentation/serial/computone.txt |
251 | (This file) | 251 | (This file) |
252 | 252 | ||
253 | You should now have a file ip2mkdev in your current working directory with | 253 | You should now have a file ip2mkdev in your current working directory with |
diff --git a/Documentation/digiepca.txt b/Documentation/serial/digiepca.txt index f2560e22f2c9..f2560e22f2c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/digiepca.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/digiepca.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/hayes-esp.txt b/Documentation/serial/hayes-esp.txt index 09b5d5856758..09b5d5856758 100644 --- a/Documentation/hayes-esp.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/hayes-esp.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio index 5337e80a5b96..5337e80a5b96 100644 --- a/Documentation/moxa-smartio +++ b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/riscom8.txt b/Documentation/serial/riscom8.txt index 14f61fdad7ca..14f61fdad7ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/riscom8.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/riscom8.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/rocket.txt b/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt index 1d8582990435..1d8582990435 100644 --- a/Documentation/rocket.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/specialix.txt b/Documentation/serial/specialix.txt index 6eb6f3a3331c..6eb6f3a3331c 100644 --- a/Documentation/specialix.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/specialix.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/stallion.txt b/Documentation/serial/stallion.txt index 5c4902d9a5be..5c4902d9a5be 100644 --- a/Documentation/stallion.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/stallion.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/sx.txt b/Documentation/serial/sx.txt index cb4efa0fb5cc..cb4efa0fb5cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/sx.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/sx.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/tty.txt b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt index 8e65c4498c52..8e65c4498c52 100644 --- a/Documentation/tty.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/sh/new-machine.txt b/Documentation/sh/new-machine.txt index 5482bf5d005b..f0354164cb0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sh/new-machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/sh/new-machine.txt | |||
@@ -47,9 +47,7 @@ Next, for companion chips: | |||
47 | `-- sh | 47 | `-- sh |
48 | `-- cchips | 48 | `-- cchips |
49 | `-- hd6446x | 49 | `-- hd6446x |
50 | |-- hd64461 | 50 | `-- hd64461 |
51 | | `-- cchip-specific files | ||
52 | `-- hd64465 | ||
53 | `-- cchip-specific files | 51 | `-- cchip-specific files |
54 | 52 | ||
55 | ... and so on. Headers for the companion chips are treated the same way as | 53 | ... and so on. Headers for the companion chips are treated the same way as |
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index e0e54a27fc10..394d7d378dc7 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | |||
@@ -1063,6 +1063,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. | |||
1063 | 1063 | ||
1064 | STAC9227/9228/9229/927x | 1064 | STAC9227/9228/9229/927x |
1065 | ref Reference board | 1065 | ref Reference board |
1066 | ref-no-jd Reference board without HP/Mic jack detection | ||
1066 | 3stack D965 3stack | 1067 | 3stack D965 3stack |
1067 | 5stack D965 5stack + SPDIF | 1068 | 5stack D965 5stack + SPDIF |
1068 | dell-3stack Dell Dimension E520 | 1069 | dell-3stack Dell Dimension E520 |
@@ -1072,10 +1073,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. | |||
1072 | ref Reference board | 1073 | ref Reference board |
1073 | dell-m4-1 Dell desktops | 1074 | dell-m4-1 Dell desktops |
1074 | dell-m4-2 Dell desktops | 1075 | dell-m4-2 Dell desktops |
1076 | dell-m4-3 Dell desktops | ||
1075 | 1077 | ||
1076 | STAC92HD73* | 1078 | STAC92HD73* |
1077 | ref Reference board | 1079 | ref Reference board |
1078 | dell-m6 Dell desktops | 1080 | no-jd BIOS setup but without jack-detection |
1081 | dell-m6-amic Dell desktops/laptops with analog mics | ||
1082 | dell-m6-dmic Dell desktops/laptops with digital mics | ||
1083 | dell-m6 Dell desktops/laptops with both type of mics | ||
1079 | 1084 | ||
1080 | STAC9872 | 1085 | STAC9872 |
1081 | vaio Setup for VAIO FE550G/SZ110 | 1086 | vaio Setup for VAIO FE550G/SZ110 |
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/.gitignore b/Documentation/spi/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4280576397e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/spi/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ | |||
1 | spidev_fdx | ||
2 | spidev_test | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary index 8bae2f018d34..0f5122eb282b 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary +++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary | |||
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like: | |||
215 | /* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can | 215 | /* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can |
216 | * run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init". | 216 | * run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init". |
217 | */ | 217 | */ |
218 | static struct mysoc_spi_data __init pdata = { ... }; | 218 | static struct mysoc_spi_data __initdata pdata = { ... }; |
219 | 219 | ||
220 | static __init board_init(void) | 220 | static __init board_init(void) |
221 | { | 221 | { |
diff --git a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt index 4cfc78835bc1..a452227361b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt +++ b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt | |||
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ Rules on what kind of patches are accepted, and which ones are not, into the | |||
12 | marked CONFIG_BROKEN), an oops, a hang, data corruption, a real | 12 | marked CONFIG_BROKEN), an oops, a hang, data corruption, a real |
13 | security issue, or some "oh, that's not good" issue. In short, something | 13 | security issue, or some "oh, that's not good" issue. In short, something |
14 | critical. | 14 | critical. |
15 | - New device IDs and quirks are also accepted. | ||
15 | - No "theoretical race condition" issues, unless an explanation of how the | 16 | - No "theoretical race condition" issues, unless an explanation of how the |
16 | race can be exploited is also provided. | 17 | race can be exploited is also provided. |
17 | - It cannot contain any "trivial" fixes in it (spelling changes, | 18 | - It cannot contain any "trivial" fixes in it (spelling changes, |
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index bde799e06598..a4ccdd1981cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt | |||
@@ -363,11 +363,21 @@ tainted: | |||
363 | Non-zero if the kernel has been tainted. Numeric values, which | 363 | Non-zero if the kernel has been tainted. Numeric values, which |
364 | can be ORed together: | 364 | can be ORed together: |
365 | 365 | ||
366 | 1 - A module with a non-GPL license has been loaded, this | 366 | 1 - A module with a non-GPL license has been loaded, this |
367 | includes modules with no license. | 367 | includes modules with no license. |
368 | Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools. | 368 | Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools. |
369 | 2 - A module was force loaded by insmod -f. | 369 | 2 - A module was force loaded by insmod -f. |
370 | Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools. | 370 | Set by modutils >= 2.4.9 and module-init-tools. |
371 | 4 - Unsafe SMP processors: SMP with CPUs not designed for SMP. | 371 | 4 - Unsafe SMP processors: SMP with CPUs not designed for SMP. |
372 | 64 - A module from drivers/staging was loaded. | 372 | 8 - A module was forcibly unloaded from the system by rmmod -f. |
373 | 16 - A hardware machine check error occurred on the system. | ||
374 | 32 - A bad page was discovered on the system. | ||
375 | 64 - The user has asked that the system be marked "tainted". This | ||
376 | could be because they are running software that directly modifies | ||
377 | the hardware, or for other reasons. | ||
378 | 128 - The system has died. | ||
379 | 256 - The ACPI DSDT has been overridden with one supplied by the user | ||
380 | instead of using the one provided by the hardware. | ||
381 | 512 - A kernel warning has occurred. | ||
382 | 1024 - A module from drivers/staging was loaded. | ||
373 | 383 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/tracers/mmiotrace.txt b/Documentation/tracers/mmiotrace.txt index 5bbbe2096223..cde23b4a12a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/tracers/mmiotrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/tracers/mmiotrace.txt | |||
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ $ echo mmiotrace > /debug/tracing/current_tracer | |||
37 | $ cat /debug/tracing/trace_pipe > mydump.txt & | 37 | $ cat /debug/tracing/trace_pipe > mydump.txt & |
38 | Start X or whatever. | 38 | Start X or whatever. |
39 | $ echo "X is up" > /debug/tracing/trace_marker | 39 | $ echo "X is up" > /debug/tracing/trace_marker |
40 | $ echo none > /debug/tracing/current_tracer | 40 | $ echo nop > /debug/tracing/current_tracer |
41 | Check for lost events. | 41 | Check for lost events. |
42 | 42 | ||
43 | 43 | ||
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ which action. It is recommended to place descriptive markers about what you | |||
66 | do. | 66 | do. |
67 | 67 | ||
68 | Shut down mmiotrace (requires root privileges): | 68 | Shut down mmiotrace (requires root privileges): |
69 | $ echo none > /debug/tracing/current_tracer | 69 | $ echo nop > /debug/tracing/current_tracer |
70 | The 'cat' process exits. If it does not, kill it by issuing 'fg' command and | 70 | The 'cat' process exits. If it does not, kill it by issuing 'fg' command and |
71 | pressing ctrl+c. | 71 | pressing ctrl+c. |
72 | 72 | ||
@@ -81,7 +81,9 @@ are: | |||
81 | $ cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries | 81 | $ cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries |
82 | gives you a number. Approximately double this number and write it back, for | 82 | gives you a number. Approximately double this number and write it back, for |
83 | instance: | 83 | instance: |
84 | $ echo 0 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled | ||
84 | $ echo 128000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries | 85 | $ echo 128000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries |
86 | $ echo 1 > /debug/tracing/tracing_enabled | ||
85 | Then start again from the top. | 87 | Then start again from the top. |
86 | 88 | ||
87 | If you are doing a trace for a driver project, e.g. Nouveau, you should also | 89 | If you are doing a trace for a driver project, e.g. Nouveau, you should also |
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt b/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4c3d62c7843a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ | |||
1 | |||
2 | Linux UWB + Wireless USB + WiNET | ||
3 | |||
4 | (C) 2005-2006 Intel Corporation | ||
5 | Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <inaky.perez-gonzalez@intel.com> | ||
6 | |||
7 | This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or | ||
8 | modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version | ||
9 | 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation. | ||
10 | |||
11 | This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | ||
12 | but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | ||
13 | MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | ||
14 | GNU General Public License for more details. | ||
15 | |||
16 | You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | ||
17 | along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software | ||
18 | Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA | ||
19 | 02110-1301, USA. | ||
20 | |||
21 | |||
22 | Please visit http://bughost.org/thewiki/Design-overview.txt-1.8 for | ||
23 | updated content. | ||
24 | |||
25 | * Design-overview.txt-1.8 | ||
26 | |||
27 | This code implements a Ultra Wide Band stack for Linux, as well as | ||
28 | drivers for the the USB based UWB radio controllers defined in the | ||
29 | Wireless USB 1.0 specification (including Wireless USB host controller | ||
30 | and an Intel WiNET controller). | ||
31 | |||
32 | 1. Introduction | ||
33 | 1. HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle | ||
34 | |||
35 | 2. DWA: Device Wired Adaptor, a Wireless USB hub for wired | ||
36 | devices | ||
37 | 3. WHCI: Wireless Host Controller Interface, the PCI WUSB host | ||
38 | adapter | ||
39 | 2. The UWB stack | ||
40 | 1. Devices and hosts: the basic structure | ||
41 | |||
42 | 2. Host Controller life cycle | ||
43 | |||
44 | 3. On the air: beacons and enumerating the radio neighborhood | ||
45 | |||
46 | 4. Device lists | ||
47 | 5. Bandwidth allocation | ||
48 | |||
49 | 3. Wireless USB Host Controller drivers | ||
50 | |||
51 | 4. Glossary | ||
52 | |||
53 | |||
54 | Introduction | ||
55 | |||
56 | UWB is a wide-band communication protocol that is to serve also as the | ||
57 | low-level protocol for others (much like TCP sits on IP). Currently | ||
58 | these others are Wireless USB and TCP/IP, but seems Bluetooth and | ||
59 | Firewire/1394 are coming along. | ||
60 | |||
61 | UWB uses a band from roughly 3 to 10 GHz, transmitting at a max of | ||
62 | ~-41dB (or 0.074 uW/MHz--geography specific data is still being | ||
63 | negotiated w/ regulators, so watch for changes). That band is divided in | ||
64 | a bunch of ~1.5 GHz wide channels (or band groups) composed of three | ||
65 | subbands/subchannels (528 MHz each). Each channel is independent of each | ||
66 | other, so you could consider them different "busses". Initially this | ||
67 | driver considers them all a single one. | ||
68 | |||
69 | Radio time is divided in 65536 us long /superframes/, each one divided | ||
70 | in 256 256us long /MASs/ (Media Allocation Slots), which are the basic | ||
71 | time/media allocation units for transferring data. At the beginning of | ||
72 | each superframe there is a Beacon Period (BP), where every device | ||
73 | transmit its beacon on a single MAS. The length of the BP depends on how | ||
74 | many devices are present and the length of their beacons. | ||
75 | |||
76 | Devices have a MAC (fixed, 48 bit address) and a device (changeable, 16 | ||
77 | bit address) and send periodic beacons to advertise themselves and pass | ||
78 | info on what they are and do. They advertise their capabilities and a | ||
79 | bunch of other stuff. | ||
80 | |||
81 | The different logical parts of this driver are: | ||
82 | |||
83 | * | ||
84 | |||
85 | *UWB*: the Ultra-Wide-Band stack -- manages the radio and | ||
86 | associated spectrum to allow for devices sharing it. Allows to | ||
87 | control bandwidth assingment, beaconing, scanning, etc | ||
88 | |||
89 | * | ||
90 | |||
91 | *WUSB*: the layer that sits on top of UWB to provide Wireless USB. | ||
92 | The Wireless USB spec defines means to control a UWB radio and to | ||
93 | do the actual WUSB. | ||
94 | |||
95 | |||
96 | HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle | ||
97 | |||
98 | WUSB also defines a device called a Host Wire Adaptor (HWA), which in | ||
99 | mere terms is a USB dongle that enables your PC to have UWB and Wireless | ||
100 | USB. The Wireless USB Host Controller in a HWA looks to the host like a | ||
101 | [Wireless] USB controller connected via USB (!) | ||
102 | |||
103 | The HWA itself is broken in two or three main interfaces: | ||
104 | |||
105 | * | ||
106 | |||
107 | *RC*: Radio control -- this implements an interface to the | ||
108 | Ultra-Wide-Band radio controller. The driver for this implements a | ||
109 | USB-based UWB Radio Controller to the UWB stack. | ||
110 | |||
111 | * | ||
112 | |||
113 | *HC*: the wireless USB host controller. It looks like a USB host | ||
114 | whose root port is the radio and the WUSB devices connect to it. | ||
115 | To the system it looks like a separate USB host. The driver (will) | ||
116 | implement a USB host controller (similar to UHCI, OHCI or EHCI) | ||
117 | for which the root hub is the radio...To reiterate: it is a USB | ||
118 | controller that is connected via USB instead of PCI. | ||
119 | |||
120 | * | ||
121 | |||
122 | *WINET*: some HW provide a WiNET interface (IP over UWB). This | ||
123 | package provides a driver for it (it looks like a network | ||
124 | interface, winetX). The driver detects when there is a link up for | ||
125 | their type and kick into gear. | ||
126 | |||
127 | |||
128 | DWA: Device Wired Adaptor, a Wireless USB hub for wired devices | ||
129 | |||
130 | These are the complement to HWAs. They are a USB host for connecting | ||
131 | wired devices, but it is connected to your PC connected via Wireless | ||
132 | USB. To the system it looks like yet another USB host. To the untrained | ||
133 | eye, it looks like a hub that connects upstream wirelessly. | ||
134 | |||
135 | We still offer no support for this; however, it should share a lot of | ||
136 | code with the HWA-RC driver; there is a bunch of factorization work that | ||
137 | has been done to support that in upcoming releases. | ||
138 | |||
139 | |||
140 | WHCI: Wireless Host Controller Interface, the PCI WUSB host adapter | ||
141 | |||
142 | This is your usual PCI device that implements WHCI. Similar in concept | ||
143 | to EHCI, it allows your wireless USB devices (including DWAs) to connect | ||
144 | to your host via a PCI interface. As in the case of the HWA, it has a | ||
145 | Radio Control interface and the WUSB Host Controller interface per se. | ||
146 | |||
147 | There is still no driver support for this, but will be in upcoming | ||
148 | releases. | ||
149 | |||
150 | |||
151 | The UWB stack | ||
152 | |||
153 | The main mission of the UWB stack is to keep a tally of which devices | ||
154 | are in radio proximity to allow drivers to connect to them. As well, it | ||
155 | provides an API for controlling the local radio controllers (RCs from | ||
156 | now on), such as to start/stop beaconing, scan, allocate bandwidth, etc. | ||
157 | |||
158 | |||
159 | Devices and hosts: the basic structure | ||
160 | |||
161 | The main building block here is the UWB device (struct uwb_dev). For | ||
162 | each device that pops up in radio presence (ie: the UWB host receives a | ||
163 | beacon from it) you get a struct uwb_dev that will show up in | ||
164 | /sys/class/uwb and in /sys/bus/uwb/devices. | ||
165 | |||
166 | For each RC that is detected, a new struct uwb_rc is created. In turn, a | ||
167 | RC is also a device, so they also show in /sys/class/uwb and | ||
168 | /sys/bus/uwb/devices, but at the same time, only radio controllers show | ||
169 | up in /sys/class/uwb_rc. | ||
170 | |||
171 | * | ||
172 | |||
173 | [*] The reason for RCs being also devices is that not only we can | ||
174 | see them while enumerating the system device tree, but also on the | ||
175 | radio (their beacons and stuff), so the handling has to be | ||
176 | likewise to that of a device. | ||
177 | |||
178 | Each RC driver is implemented by a separate driver that plugs into the | ||
179 | interface that the UWB stack provides through a struct uwb_rc_ops. The | ||
180 | spec creators have been nice enough to make the message format the same | ||
181 | for HWA and WHCI RCs, so the driver is really a very thin transport that | ||
182 | moves the requests from the UWB API to the device [/uwb_rc_ops->cmd()/] | ||
183 | and sends the replies and notifications back to the API | ||
184 | [/uwb_rc_neh_grok()/]. Notifications are handled to the UWB daemon, that | ||
185 | is chartered, among other things, to keep the tab of how the UWB radio | ||
186 | neighborhood looks, creating and destroying devices as they show up or | ||
187 | dissapear. | ||
188 | |||
189 | Command execution is very simple: a command block is sent and a event | ||
190 | block or reply is expected back. For sending/receiving command/events, a | ||
191 | handle called /neh/ (Notification/Event Handle) is opened with | ||
192 | /uwb_rc_neh_open()/. | ||
193 | |||
194 | The HWA-RC (USB dongle) driver (drivers/uwb/hwa-rc.c) does this job for | ||
195 | the USB connected HWA. Eventually, drivers/whci-rc.c will do the same | ||
196 | for the PCI connected WHCI controller. | ||
197 | |||
198 | |||
199 | Host Controller life cycle | ||
200 | |||
201 | So let's say we connect a dongle to the system: it is detected and | ||
202 | firmware uploaded if needed [for Intel's i1480 | ||
203 | /drivers/uwb/ptc/usb.c:ptc_usb_probe()/] and then it is reenumerated. | ||
204 | Now we have a real HWA device connected and | ||
205 | /drivers/uwb/hwa-rc.c:hwarc_probe()/ picks it up, that will set up the | ||
206 | Wire-Adaptor environment and then suck it into the UWB stack's vision of | ||
207 | the world [/drivers/uwb/lc-rc.c:uwb_rc_add()/]. | ||
208 | |||
209 | * | ||
210 | |||
211 | [*] The stack should put a new RC to scan for devices | ||
212 | [/uwb_rc_scan()/] so it finds what's available around and tries to | ||
213 | connect to them, but this is policy stuff and should be driven | ||
214 | from user space. As of now, the operator is expected to do it | ||
215 | manually; see the release notes for documentation on the procedure. | ||
216 | |||
217 | When a dongle is disconnected, /drivers/uwb/hwa-rc.c:hwarc_disconnect()/ | ||
218 | takes time of tearing everything down safely (or not...). | ||
219 | |||
220 | |||
221 | On the air: beacons and enumerating the radio neighborhood | ||
222 | |||
223 | So assuming we have devices and we have agreed for a channel to connect | ||
224 | on (let's say 9), we put the new RC to beacon: | ||
225 | |||
226 | * | ||
227 | |||
228 | $ echo 9 0 > /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwb0/beacon | ||
229 | |||
230 | Now it is visible. If there were other devices in the same radio channel | ||
231 | and beacon group (that's what the zero is for), the dongle's radio | ||
232 | control interface will send beacon notifications on its | ||
233 | notification/event endpoint (NEEP). The beacon notifications are part of | ||
234 | the event stream that is funneled into the API with | ||
235 | /drivers/uwb/neh.c:uwb_rc_neh_grok()/ and delivered to the UWBD, the UWB | ||
236 | daemon through a notification list. | ||
237 | |||
238 | UWBD wakes up and scans the event list; finds a beacon and adds it to | ||
239 | the BEACON CACHE (/uwb_beca/). If he receives a number of beacons from | ||
240 | the same device, he considers it to be 'onair' and creates a new device | ||
241 | [/drivers/uwb/lc-dev.c:uwbd_dev_onair()/]. Similarly, when no beacons | ||
242 | are received in some time, the device is considered gone and wiped out | ||
243 | [uwbd calls periodically /uwb/beacon.c:uwb_beca_purge()/ that will purge | ||
244 | the beacon cache of dead devices]. | ||
245 | |||
246 | |||
247 | Device lists | ||
248 | |||
249 | All UWB devices are kept in the list of the struct bus_type uwb_bus. | ||
250 | |||
251 | |||
252 | Bandwidth allocation | ||
253 | |||
254 | The UWB stack maintains a local copy of DRP availability through | ||
255 | processing of incoming *DRP Availability Change* notifications. This | ||
256 | local copy is currently used to present the current bandwidth | ||
257 | availability to the user through the sysfs file | ||
258 | /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbx/bw_avail. In the future the bandwidth | ||
259 | availability information will be used by the bandwidth reservation | ||
260 | routines. | ||
261 | |||
262 | The bandwidth reservation routines are in progress and are thus not | ||
263 | present in the current release. When completed they will enable a user | ||
264 | to initiate DRP reservation requests through interaction with sysfs. DRP | ||
265 | reservation requests from remote UWB devices will also be handled. The | ||
266 | bandwidth management done by the UWB stack will include callbacks to the | ||
267 | higher layers will enable the higher layers to use the reservations upon | ||
268 | completion. [Note: The bandwidth reservation work is in progress and | ||
269 | subject to change.] | ||
270 | |||
271 | |||
272 | Wireless USB Host Controller drivers | ||
273 | |||
274 | *WARNING* This section needs a lot of work! | ||
275 | |||
276 | As explained above, there are three different types of HCs in the WUSB | ||
277 | world: HWA-HC, DWA-HC and WHCI-HC. | ||
278 | |||
279 | HWA-HC and DWA-HC share that they are Wire-Adapters (USB or WUSB | ||
280 | connected controllers), and their transfer management system is almost | ||
281 | identical. So is their notification delivery system. | ||
282 | |||
283 | HWA-HC and WHCI-HC share that they are both WUSB host controllers, so | ||
284 | they have to deal with WUSB device life cycle and maintenance, wireless | ||
285 | root-hub | ||
286 | |||
287 | HWA exposes a Host Controller interface (HWA-HC 0xe0/02/02). This has | ||
288 | three endpoints (Notifications, Data Transfer In and Data Transfer | ||
289 | Out--known as NEP, DTI and DTO in the code). | ||
290 | |||
291 | We reserve UWB bandwidth for our Wireless USB Cluster, create a Cluster | ||
292 | ID and tell the HC to use all that. Then we start it. This means the HC | ||
293 | starts sending MMCs. | ||
294 | |||
295 | * | ||
296 | |||
297 | The MMCs are blocks of data defined somewhere in the WUSB1.0 spec | ||
298 | that define a stream in the UWB channel time allocated for sending | ||
299 | WUSB IEs (host to device commands/notifications) and Device | ||
300 | Notifications (device initiated to host). Each host defines a | ||
301 | unique Wireless USB cluster through MMCs. Devices can connect to a | ||
302 | single cluster at the time. The IEs are Information Elements, and | ||
303 | among them are the bandwidth allocations that tell each device | ||
304 | when can they transmit or receive. | ||
305 | |||
306 | Now it all depends on external stimuli. | ||
307 | |||
308 | *New device connection* | ||
309 | |||
310 | A new device pops up, it scans the radio looking for MMCs that give out | ||
311 | the existence of Wireless USB channels. Once one (or more) are found, | ||
312 | selects which one to connect to. Sends a /DN_Connect/ (device | ||
313 | notification connect) during the DNTS (Device Notification Time | ||
314 | Slot--announced in the MMCs | ||
315 | |||
316 | HC picks the /DN_Connect/ out (nep module sends to notif.c for delivery | ||
317 | into /devconnect/). This process starts the authentication process for | ||
318 | the device. First we allocate a /fake port/ and assign an | ||
319 | unauthenticated address (128 to 255--what we really do is | ||
320 | 0x80 | fake_port_idx). We fiddle with the fake port status and /khubd/ | ||
321 | sees a new connection, so he moves on to enable the fake port with a reset. | ||
322 | |||
323 | So now we are in the reset path -- we know we have a non-yet enumerated | ||
324 | device with an unauthorized address; we ask user space to authenticate | ||
325 | (FIXME: not yet done, similar to bluetooth pairing), then we do the key | ||
326 | exchange (FIXME: not yet done) and issue a /set address 0/ to bring the | ||
327 | device to the default state. Device is authenticated. | ||
328 | |||
329 | From here, the USB stack takes control through the usb_hcd ops. khubd | ||
330 | has seen the port status changes, as we have been toggling them. It will | ||
331 | start enumerating and doing transfers through usb_hcd->urb_enqueue() to | ||
332 | read descriptors and move our data. | ||
333 | |||
334 | *Device life cycle and keep alives* | ||
335 | |||
336 | Everytime there is a succesful transfer to/from a device, we update a | ||
337 | per-device activity timestamp. If not, every now and then we check and | ||
338 | if the activity timestamp gets old, we ping the device by sending it a | ||
339 | Keep Alive IE; it responds with a /DN_Alive/ pong during the DNTS (this | ||
340 | arrives to us as a notification through | ||
341 | devconnect.c:wusb_handle_dn_alive(). If a device times out, we | ||
342 | disconnect it from the system (cleaning up internal information and | ||
343 | toggling the bits in the fake hub port, which kicks khubd into removing | ||
344 | the rest of the stuff). | ||
345 | |||
346 | This is done through devconnect:__wusb_check_devs(), which will scan the | ||
347 | device list looking for whom needs refreshing. | ||
348 | |||
349 | If the device wants to disconnect, it will either die (ugly) or send a | ||
350 | /DN_Disconnect/ that will prompt a disconnection from the system. | ||
351 | |||
352 | *Sending and receiving data* | ||
353 | |||
354 | Data is sent and received through /Remote Pipes/ (rpipes). An rpipe is | ||
355 | /aimed/ at an endpoint in a WUSB device. This is the same for HWAs and | ||
356 | DWAs. | ||
357 | |||
358 | Each HC has a number of rpipes and buffers that can be assigned to them; | ||
359 | when doing a data transfer (xfer), first the rpipe has to be aimed and | ||
360 | prepared (buffers assigned), then we can start queueing requests for | ||
361 | data in or out. | ||
362 | |||
363 | Data buffers have to be segmented out before sending--so we send first a | ||
364 | header (segment request) and then if there is any data, a data buffer | ||
365 | immediately after to the DTI interface (yep, even the request). If our | ||
366 | buffer is bigger than the max segment size, then we just do multiple | ||
367 | requests. | ||
368 | |||
369 | [This sucks, because doing USB scatter gatter in Linux is resource | ||
370 | intensive, if any...not that the current approach is not. It just has to | ||
371 | be cleaned up a lot :)]. | ||
372 | |||
373 | If reading, we don't send data buffers, just the segment headers saying | ||
374 | we want to read segments. | ||
375 | |||
376 | When the xfer is executed, we receive a notification that says data is | ||
377 | ready in the DTI endpoint (handled through | ||
378 | xfer.c:wa_handle_notif_xfer()). In there we read from the DTI endpoint a | ||
379 | descriptor that gives us the status of the transfer, its identification | ||
380 | (given when we issued it) and the segment number. If it was a data read, | ||
381 | we issue another URB to read into the destination buffer the chunk of | ||
382 | data coming out of the remote endpoint. Done, wait for the next guy. The | ||
383 | callbacks for the URBs issued from here are the ones that will declare | ||
384 | the xfer complete at some point and call it's callback. | ||
385 | |||
386 | Seems simple, but the implementation is not trivial. | ||
387 | |||
388 | * | ||
389 | |||
390 | *WARNING* Old!! | ||
391 | |||
392 | The main xfer descriptor, wa_xfer (equivalent to a URB) contains an | ||
393 | array of segments, tallys on segments and buffers and callback | ||
394 | information. Buried in there is a lot of URBs for executing the segments | ||
395 | and buffer transfers. | ||
396 | |||
397 | For OUT xfers, there is an array of segments, one URB for each, another | ||
398 | one of buffer URB. When submitting, we submit URBs for segment request | ||
399 | 1, buffer 1, segment 2, buffer 2...etc. Then we wait on the DTI for xfer | ||
400 | result data; when all the segments are complete, we call the callback to | ||
401 | finalize the transfer. | ||
402 | |||
403 | For IN xfers, we only issue URBs for the segments we want to read and | ||
404 | then wait for the xfer result data. | ||
405 | |||
406 | *URB mapping into xfers* | ||
407 | |||
408 | This is done by hwahc_op_urb_[en|de]queue(). In enqueue() we aim an | ||
409 | rpipe to the endpoint where we have to transmit, create a transfer | ||
410 | context (wa_xfer) and submit it. When the xfer is done, our callback is | ||
411 | called and we assign the status bits and release the xfer resources. | ||
412 | |||
413 | In dequeue() we are basically cancelling/aborting the transfer. We issue | ||
414 | a xfer abort request to the HC, cancell all the URBs we had submitted | ||
415 | and not yet done and when all that is done, the xfer callback will be | ||
416 | called--this will call the URB callback. | ||
417 | |||
418 | |||
419 | Glossary | ||
420 | |||
421 | *DWA* -- Device Wire Adapter | ||
422 | |||
423 | USB host, wired for downstream devices, upstream connects wirelessly | ||
424 | with Wireless USB. | ||
425 | |||
426 | *EVENT* -- Response to a command on the NEEP | ||
427 | |||
428 | *HWA* -- Host Wire Adapter / USB dongle for UWB and Wireless USB | ||
429 | |||
430 | *NEH* -- Notification/Event Handle | ||
431 | |||
432 | Handle/file descriptor for receiving notifications or events. The WA | ||
433 | code requires you to get one of this to listen for notifications or | ||
434 | events on the NEEP. | ||
435 | |||
436 | *NEEP* -- Notification/Event EndPoint | ||
437 | |||
438 | Stuff related to the management of the first endpoint of a HWA USB | ||
439 | dongle that is used to deliver an stream of events and notifications to | ||
440 | the host. | ||
441 | |||
442 | *NOTIFICATION* -- Message coming in the NEEP as response to something. | ||
443 | |||
444 | *RC* -- Radio Control | ||
445 | |||
446 | Design-overview.txt-1.8 (last edited 2006-11-04 12:22:24 by | ||
447 | InakyPerezGonzalez) | ||
448 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt index 9b22bd14c348..eac7df94d8e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt | |||
@@ -114,11 +114,11 @@ modules. | |||
114 | Then you must load the gadget serial driver. To load it as an | 114 | Then you must load the gadget serial driver. To load it as an |
115 | ACM device (recommended for interoperability), do this: | 115 | ACM device (recommended for interoperability), do this: |
116 | 116 | ||
117 | modprobe g_serial use_acm=1 | 117 | modprobe g_serial |
118 | 118 | ||
119 | To load it as a vendor specific bulk in/out device, do this: | 119 | To load it as a vendor specific bulk in/out device, do this: |
120 | 120 | ||
121 | modprobe g_serial | 121 | modprobe g_serial use_acm=0 |
122 | 122 | ||
123 | This will also automatically load the underlying gadget peripheral | 123 | This will also automatically load the underlying gadget peripheral |
124 | controller driver. This must be done each time you reboot the gadget | 124 | controller driver. This must be done each time you reboot the gadget |
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt b/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt index 077e9032d0cd..fafcd4723260 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt | |||
@@ -49,8 +49,10 @@ it and 002/048 sometime later. | |||
49 | 49 | ||
50 | These files can be read as binary data. The binary data consists | 50 | These files can be read as binary data. The binary data consists |
51 | of first the device descriptor, then the descriptors for each | 51 | of first the device descriptor, then the descriptors for each |
52 | configuration of the device. That information is also shown in | 52 | configuration of the device. Multi-byte fields in the device and |
53 | text form by the /proc/bus/usb/devices file, described later. | 53 | configuration descriptors, but not other descriptors, are converted |
54 | to host endianness by the kernel. This information is also shown | ||
55 | in text form by the /proc/bus/usb/devices file, described later. | ||
54 | 56 | ||
55 | These files may also be used to write user-level drivers for the USB | 57 | These files may also be used to write user-level drivers for the USB |
56 | devices. You would open the /proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD file read/write, | 58 | devices. You would open the /proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD file read/write, |
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt index 2917ce4ffdc4..270481906dc8 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt | |||
@@ -34,11 +34,12 @@ if usbmon is built into the kernel. | |||
34 | Verify that bus sockets are present. | 34 | Verify that bus sockets are present. |
35 | 35 | ||
36 | # ls /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon | 36 | # ls /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon |
37 | 0s 0t 0u 1s 1t 1u 2s 2t 2u 3s 3t 3u 4s 4t 4u | 37 | 0s 0u 1s 1t 1u 2s 2t 2u 3s 3t 3u 4s 4t 4u |
38 | # | 38 | # |
39 | 39 | ||
40 | Now you can choose to either use the sockets numbered '0' (to capture packets on | 40 | Now you can choose to either use the socket '0u' (to capture packets on all |
41 | all buses), and skip to step #3, or find the bus used by your device with step #2. | 41 | buses), and skip to step #3, or find the bus used by your device with step #2. |
42 | This allows to filter away annoying devices that talk continuously. | ||
42 | 43 | ||
43 | 2. Find which bus connects to the desired device | 44 | 2. Find which bus connects to the desired device |
44 | 45 | ||
@@ -99,8 +100,9 @@ on the event type, but there is a set of words, common for all types. | |||
99 | 100 | ||
100 | Here is the list of words, from left to right: | 101 | Here is the list of words, from left to right: |
101 | 102 | ||
102 | - URB Tag. This is used to identify URBs is normally a kernel mode address | 103 | - URB Tag. This is used to identify URBs, and is normally an in-kernel address |
103 | of the URB structure in hexadecimal. | 104 | of the URB structure in hexadecimal, but can be a sequence number or any |
105 | other unique string, within reason. | ||
104 | 106 | ||
105 | - Timestamp in microseconds, a decimal number. The timestamp's resolution | 107 | - Timestamp in microseconds, a decimal number. The timestamp's resolution |
106 | depends on available clock, and so it can be much worse than a microsecond | 108 | depends on available clock, and so it can be much worse than a microsecond |
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2e78b70f3adc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ | |||
1 | #! /bin/bash | ||
2 | # | ||
3 | |||
4 | set -e | ||
5 | |||
6 | progname=$(basename $0) | ||
7 | function help | ||
8 | { | ||
9 | cat <<EOF | ||
10 | Usage: $progname COMMAND DEVICEs [ARGS] | ||
11 | |||
12 | Command for manipulating the pairing/authentication credentials of a | ||
13 | Wireless USB device that supports wired-mode Cable-Based-Association. | ||
14 | |||
15 | Works in conjunction with the wusb-cba.ko driver from http://linuxuwb.org. | ||
16 | |||
17 | |||
18 | DEVICE | ||
19 | |||
20 | sysfs path to the device to authenticate; for example, both this | ||
21 | guys are the same: | ||
22 | |||
23 | /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.7/usb1/1-4/1-4.4/1-4.4:1.1 | ||
24 | /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb-cbaf/1-4.4:1.1 | ||
25 | |||
26 | COMMAND/ARGS are | ||
27 | |||
28 | start | ||
29 | |||
30 | Start a WUSB host controller (by setting up a CHID) | ||
31 | |||
32 | set-chid DEVICE HOST-CHID HOST-BANDGROUP HOST-NAME | ||
33 | |||
34 | Sets host information in the device; after this you can call the | ||
35 | get-cdid to see how does this device report itself to us. | ||
36 | |||
37 | get-cdid DEVICE | ||
38 | |||
39 | Get the device ID associated to the HOST-CHDI we sent with | ||
40 | 'set-chid'. We might not know about it. | ||
41 | |||
42 | set-cc DEVICE | ||
43 | |||
44 | If we allow the device to connect, set a random new CDID and CK | ||
45 | (connection key). Device saves them for the next time it wants to | ||
46 | connect wireless. We save them for that next time also so we can | ||
47 | authenticate the device (when we see the CDID he uses to id | ||
48 | itself) and the CK to crypto talk to it. | ||
49 | |||
50 | CHID is always 16 hex bytes in 'XX YY ZZ...' form | ||
51 | BANDGROUP is almost always 0001 | ||
52 | |||
53 | Examples: | ||
54 | |||
55 | You can default most arguments to '' to get a sane value: | ||
56 | |||
57 | $ $progname set-chid '' '' '' "My host name" | ||
58 | |||
59 | A full sequence: | ||
60 | |||
61 | $ $progname set-chid '' '' '' "My host name" | ||
62 | $ $progname get-cdid '' | ||
63 | $ $progname set-cc '' | ||
64 | |||
65 | EOF | ||
66 | } | ||
67 | |||
68 | |||
69 | # Defaults | ||
70 | # FIXME: CHID should come from a database :), band group from the host | ||
71 | host_CHID="00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 aa bb cc dd ee ff" | ||
72 | host_band_group="0001" | ||
73 | host_name=$(hostname) | ||
74 | |||
75 | devs="$(echo /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb-cbaf/[0-9]*)" | ||
76 | hdevs="$(for h in /sys/class/uwb_rc/*/wusbhc; do readlink -f $h; done)" | ||
77 | |||
78 | result=0 | ||
79 | case $1 in | ||
80 | start) | ||
81 | for dev in ${2:-$hdevs} | ||
82 | do | ||
83 | uwb_rc=$(readlink -f $dev/uwb_rc) | ||
84 | if cat $uwb_rc/beacon | grep -q -- "-1" | ||
85 | then | ||
86 | echo 13 0 > $uwb_rc/beacon | ||
87 | echo I: started beaconing on ch 13 on $(basename $uwb_rc) >&2 | ||
88 | fi | ||
89 | echo $host_CHID > $dev/wusb_chid | ||
90 | echo I: started host $(basename $dev) >&2 | ||
91 | done | ||
92 | ;; | ||
93 | stop) | ||
94 | for dev in ${2:-$hdevs} | ||
95 | do | ||
96 | echo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 > $dev/wusb_chid | ||
97 | echo I: stopped host $(basename $dev) >&2 | ||
98 | uwb_rc=$(readlink -f $dev/uwb_rc) | ||
99 | echo -1 | cat > $uwb_rc/beacon | ||
100 | echo I: stopped beaconing on $(basename $uwb_rc) >&2 | ||
101 | done | ||
102 | ;; | ||
103 | set-chid) | ||
104 | shift | ||
105 | for dev in ${2:-$devs}; do | ||
106 | echo "${4:-$host_name}" > $dev/wusb_host_name | ||
107 | echo "${3:-$host_band_group}" > $dev/wusb_host_band_groups | ||
108 | echo ${2:-$host_CHID} > $dev/wusb_chid | ||
109 | done | ||
110 | ;; | ||
111 | get-cdid) | ||
112 | for dev in ${2:-$devs} | ||
113 | do | ||
114 | cat $dev/wusb_cdid | ||
115 | done | ||
116 | ;; | ||
117 | set-cc) | ||
118 | for dev in ${2:-$devs}; do | ||
119 | shift | ||
120 | CDID="$(head --bytes=16 /dev/urandom | od -tx1 -An)" | ||
121 | CK="$(head --bytes=16 /dev/urandom | od -tx1 -An)" | ||
122 | echo "$CDID" > $dev/wusb_cdid | ||
123 | echo "$CK" > $dev/wusb_ck | ||
124 | |||
125 | echo I: CC set >&2 | ||
126 | echo "CHID: $(cat $dev/wusb_chid)" | ||
127 | echo "CDID:$CDID" | ||
128 | echo "CK: $CK" | ||
129 | done | ||
130 | ;; | ||
131 | help|h|--help|-h) | ||
132 | help | ||
133 | ;; | ||
134 | *) | ||
135 | echo "E: Unknown usage" 1>&2 | ||
136 | help 1>&2 | ||
137 | result=1 | ||
138 | esac | ||
139 | exit $result | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/.gitignore b/Documentation/video4linux/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..952703943e8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
v4lgrab | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 index 06a33a4f52fd..166d5960b1a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 | |||
@@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ audio | |||
27 | sound card) should be possible, but there is no code yet ... | 27 | sound card) should be possible, but there is no code yet ... |
28 | 28 | ||
29 | vbi | 29 | vbi |
30 | - some code present. Doesn't crash any more, but also doesn't | 30 | - Code present. Works for NTSC closed caption. PAL and other |
31 | work yet ... | 31 | TV norms may or may not work. |
32 | 32 | ||
33 | 33 | ||
34 | how to add support for new cards | 34 | how to add support for new cards |
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CONTRIBUTORS b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CONTRIBUTORS index 8aad6dd93d6b..eb41b2650860 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CONTRIBUTORS +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CONTRIBUTORS | |||
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Contributors to bttv: | |||
3 | Michael Chu <mmchu@pobox.com> | 3 | Michael Chu <mmchu@pobox.com> |
4 | AverMedia fix and more flexible card recognition | 4 | AverMedia fix and more flexible card recognition |
5 | 5 | ||
6 | Alan Cox <alan@redhat.com> | 6 | Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk> |
7 | Video4Linux interface and 2.1.x kernel adaptation | 7 | Video4Linux interface and 2.1.x kernel adaptation |
8 | 8 | ||
9 | Chris Kleitsch | 9 | Chris Kleitsch |
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..11c5fd22a332 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ | |||
1 | Driver for USB radios for the Silicon Labs Si470x FM Radio Receivers | ||
2 | |||
3 | Copyright (c) 2008 Tobias Lorenz <tobias.lorenz@gmx.net> | ||
4 | |||
5 | |||
6 | Information from Silicon Labs | ||
7 | ============================= | ||
8 | Silicon Laboratories is the manufacturer of the radio ICs, that nowadays are the | ||
9 | most often used radio receivers in cell phones. Usually they are connected with | ||
10 | I2C. But SiLabs also provides a reference design, which integrates this IC, | ||
11 | together with a small microcontroller C8051F321, to form a USB radio. | ||
12 | Part of this reference design is also a radio application in binary and source | ||
13 | code. The software also contains an automatic firmware upgrade to the most | ||
14 | current version. Information on these can be downloaded here: | ||
15 | http://www.silabs.com/usbradio | ||
16 | |||
17 | |||
18 | Supported ICs | ||
19 | ============= | ||
20 | The following ICs have a very similar register set, so that they are or will be | ||
21 | supported somewhen by the driver: | ||
22 | - Si4700: FM radio receiver | ||
23 | - Si4701: FM radio receiver, RDS Support | ||
24 | - Si4702: FM radio receiver | ||
25 | - Si4703: FM radio receiver, RDS Support | ||
26 | - Si4704: FM radio receiver, no external antenna required | ||
27 | - Si4705: FM radio receiver, no external antenna required, RDS support, Dig I/O | ||
28 | - Si4706: Enhanced FM RDS/TMC radio receiver, no external antenna required, RDS | ||
29 | Support | ||
30 | - Si4707: Dedicated weather band radio receiver with SAME decoder, RDS Support | ||
31 | - Si4708: Smallest FM receivers | ||
32 | - Si4709: Smallest FM receivers, RDS Support | ||
33 | More information on these can be downloaded here: | ||
34 | http://www.silabs.com/products/mcu/Pages/USBFMRadioRD.aspx | ||
35 | |||
36 | |||
37 | Supported USB devices | ||
38 | ===================== | ||
39 | Currently the following USB radios (vendor:product) with the Silicon Labs si470x | ||
40 | chips are known to work: | ||
41 | - 10c4:818a: Silicon Labs USB FM Radio Reference Design | ||
42 | - 06e1:a155: ADS/Tech FM Radio Receiver (formerly Instant FM Music) (RDX-155-EF) | ||
43 | - 1b80:d700: KWorld USB FM Radio SnapMusic Mobile 700 (FM700) | ||
44 | |||
45 | |||
46 | Software | ||
47 | ======== | ||
48 | Testing is usually done with most application under Debian/testing: | ||
49 | - fmtools - Utility for managing FM tuner cards | ||
50 | - gnomeradio - FM-radio tuner for the GNOME desktop | ||
51 | - gradio - GTK FM radio tuner | ||
52 | - kradio - Comfortable Radio Application for KDE | ||
53 | - radio - ncurses-based radio application | ||
54 | |||
55 | There is also a library libv4l, which can be used. It's going to have a function | ||
56 | for frequency seeking, either by using hardware functionality as in radio-si470x | ||
57 | or by implementing a function as we currently have in every of the mentioned | ||
58 | programs. Somewhen the radio programs should make use of libv4l. | ||
59 | |||
60 | For processing RDS information, there is a project ongoing at: | ||
61 | http://rdsd.berlios.de/ | ||
62 | |||
63 | There is currently no project for making TMC sentences human readable. | ||
64 | |||
65 | |||
66 | Audio Listing | ||
67 | ============= | ||
68 | USB Audio is provided by the ALSA snd_usb_audio module. It is recommended to | ||
69 | also select SND_USB_AUDIO, as this is required to get sound from the radio. For | ||
70 | listing you have to redirect the sound, for example using one of the following | ||
71 | commands. | ||
72 | |||
73 | If you just want to test audio (very poor quality): | ||
74 | cat /dev/dsp1 > /dev/dsp | ||
75 | |||
76 | If you use OSS try: | ||
77 | sox -2 --endian little -r 96000 -t oss /dev/dsp1 -t oss /dev/dsp | ||
78 | |||
79 | If you use arts try: | ||
80 | arecord -D hw:1,0 -r96000 -c2 -f S16_LE | artsdsp aplay -B - | ||
81 | |||
82 | |||
83 | Module Parameters | ||
84 | ================= | ||
85 | After loading the module, you still have access to some of them in the sysfs | ||
86 | mount under /sys/module/radio_si470x/parameters. The contents of read-only files | ||
87 | (0444) are not updated, even if space, band and de are changed using private | ||
88 | video controls. The others are runtime changeable. | ||
89 | |||
90 | |||
91 | Errors | ||
92 | ====== | ||
93 | Increase tune_timeout, if you often get -EIO errors. | ||
94 | |||
95 | When timed out or band limit is reached, hw_freq_seek returns -EAGAIN. | ||
96 | |||
97 | If you get any errors from snd_usb_audio, please report them to the ALSA people. | ||
98 | |||
99 | |||
100 | Open Issues | ||
101 | =========== | ||
102 | V4L minor device allocation and parameter setting is not perfect. A solution is | ||
103 | currently under discussion. | ||
104 | |||
105 | There is an USB interface for downloading/uploading new firmware images. Support | ||
106 | for it can be implemented using the request_firmware interface. | ||
107 | |||
108 | There is a RDS interrupt mode. The driver is already using the same interface | ||
109 | for polling RDS information, but is currently not using the interrupt mode. | ||
110 | |||
111 | There is a LED interface, which can be used to override the LED control | ||
112 | programmed in the firmware. This can be made available using the LED support | ||
113 | functions in the kernel. | ||
114 | |||
115 | |||
116 | Other useful information and links | ||
117 | ================================== | ||
118 | http://www.silabs.com/usbradio | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/.gitignore b/Documentation/vm/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..33e8a023df02 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vm/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1 @@ | |||
slabinfo | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq b/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ca722e09b6a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ | |||
1 | Kernel driver for omap HDQ/1-wire module. | ||
2 | ======================================== | ||
3 | |||
4 | Supported chips: | ||
5 | ================ | ||
6 | HDQ/1-wire controller on the TI OMAP 2430/3430 platforms. | ||
7 | |||
8 | A useful link about HDQ basics: | ||
9 | =============================== | ||
10 | http://focus.ti.com/lit/an/slua408/slua408.pdf | ||
11 | |||
12 | Description: | ||
13 | ============ | ||
14 | The HDQ/1-Wire module of TI OMAP2430/3430 platforms implement the hardware | ||
15 | protocol of the master functions of the Benchmark HDQ and the Dallas | ||
16 | Semiconductor 1-Wire protocols. These protocols use a single wire for | ||
17 | communication between the master (HDQ/1-Wire controller) and the slave | ||
18 | (HDQ/1-Wire external compliant device). | ||
19 | |||
20 | A typical application of the HDQ/1-Wire module is the communication with battery | ||
21 | monitor (gas gauge) integrated circuits. | ||
22 | |||
23 | The controller supports operation in both HDQ and 1-wire mode. The essential | ||
24 | difference between the HDQ and 1-wire mode is how the slave device responds to | ||
25 | initialization pulse.In HDQ mode, the firmware does not require the host to | ||
26 | create an initialization pulse to the slave.However, the slave can be reset by | ||
27 | using an initialization pulse (also referred to as a break pulse).The slave | ||
28 | does not respond with a presence pulse as it does in the 1-Wire protocol. | ||
29 | |||
30 | Remarks: | ||
31 | ======== | ||
32 | The driver (drivers/w1/masters/omap_hdq.c) supports the HDQ mode of the | ||
33 | controller. In this mode, as we can not read the ID which obeys the W1 | ||
34 | spec(family:id:crc), a module parameter can be passed to the driver which will | ||
35 | be used to calculate the CRC and pass back an appropriate slave ID to the W1 | ||
36 | core. | ||
37 | |||
38 | By default the master driver and the BQ slave i/f | ||
39 | driver(drivers/w1/slaves/w1_bq27000.c) sets the ID to 1. | ||
40 | Please note to load both the modules with a different ID if required, but note | ||
41 | that the ID used should be same for both master and slave driver loading. | ||
42 | |||
43 | e.g: | ||
44 | insmod omap_hdq.ko W1_ID=2 | ||
45 | inamod w1_bq27000.ko F_ID=2 | ||
46 | |||
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/src/.gitignore b/Documentation/watchdog/src/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ac90997dba93 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/src/.gitignore | |||
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ | |||
1 | watchdog-simple | ||
2 | watchdog-test | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 83c0033ee9e0..fcdc62b3c3d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt | |||
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Protocol: 2.00+ | |||
349 | 3 SYSLINUX | 349 | 3 SYSLINUX |
350 | 4 EtherBoot | 350 | 4 EtherBoot |
351 | 5 ELILO | 351 | 5 ELILO |
352 | 7 GRuB | 352 | 7 GRUB |
353 | 8 U-BOOT | 353 | 8 U-BOOT |
354 | 9 Xen | 354 | 9 Xen |
355 | A Gujin | 355 | A Gujin |
@@ -537,8 +537,8 @@ Type: read | |||
537 | Offset/size: 0x248/4 | 537 | Offset/size: 0x248/4 |
538 | Protocol: 2.08+ | 538 | Protocol: 2.08+ |
539 | 539 | ||
540 | If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the | 540 | If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the beginning |
541 | real-mode code to the payload. | 541 | of the protected-mode code to the payload. |
542 | 542 | ||
543 | The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and | 543 | The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and |
544 | uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic | 544 | uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic |
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt index c93ff5f4c0dd..cf08c9fff3cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt | |||
@@ -80,6 +80,30 @@ pci proc | -- | -- | WC | | |||
80 | | | | | | 80 | | | | | |
81 | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | 81 | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
82 | 82 | ||
83 | Advanced APIs for drivers | ||
84 | ------------------------- | ||
85 | A. Exporting pages to users with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range, | ||
86 | vm_insert_pfn | ||
87 | |||
88 | Drivers wanting to export some pages to userspace do it by using mmap | ||
89 | interface and a combination of | ||
90 | 1) pgprot_noncached() | ||
91 | 2) io_remap_pfn_range() or remap_pfn_range() or vm_insert_pfn() | ||
92 | |||
93 | With PAT support, a new API pgprot_writecombine is being added. So, drivers can | ||
94 | continue to use the above sequence, with either pgprot_noncached() or | ||
95 | pgprot_writecombine() in step 1, followed by step 2. | ||
96 | |||
97 | In addition, step 2 internally tracks the region as UC or WC in memtype | ||
98 | list in order to ensure no conflicting mapping. | ||
99 | |||
100 | Note that this set of APIs only works with IO (non RAM) regions. If driver | ||
101 | wants to export a RAM region, it has to do set_memory_uc() or set_memory_wc() | ||
102 | as step 0 above and also track the usage of those pages and use set_memory_wb() | ||
103 | before the page is freed to free pool. | ||
104 | |||
105 | |||
106 | |||
83 | Notes: | 107 | Notes: |
84 | 108 | ||
85 | -- in the above table mean "Not suggested usage for the API". Some of the --'s | 109 | -- in the above table mean "Not suggested usage for the API". Some of the --'s |
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 72ffb5373ec7..34c13040a718 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | |||
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ APICs | |||
35 | 35 | ||
36 | nolapic Don't use the local APIC (alias for i386 compatibility) | 36 | nolapic Don't use the local APIC (alias for i386 compatibility) |
37 | 37 | ||
38 | pirq=... See Documentation/i386/IO-APIC.txt | 38 | pirq=... See Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt |
39 | 39 | ||
40 | noapictimer Don't set up the APIC timer | 40 | noapictimer Don't set up the APIC timer |
41 | 41 | ||
@@ -79,17 +79,6 @@ Timing | |||
79 | Report when timer interrupts are lost because some code turned off | 79 | Report when timer interrupts are lost because some code turned off |
80 | interrupts for too long. | 80 | interrupts for too long. |
81 | 81 | ||
82 | nmi_watchdog=NUMBER[,panic] | ||
83 | NUMBER can be: | ||
84 | 0 don't use an NMI watchdog | ||
85 | 1 use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog | ||
86 | 2 use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using a performance counter. Note | ||
87 | This will use one performance counter and the local APIC's performance | ||
88 | vector. | ||
89 | When panic is specified panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs. | ||
90 | This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box | ||
91 | quickly up again. | ||
92 | |||
93 | nohpet | 82 | nohpet |
94 | Don't use the HPET timer. | 83 | Don't use the HPET timer. |
95 | 84 | ||
@@ -139,7 +128,7 @@ Non Executable Mappings | |||
139 | SMP | 128 | SMP |
140 | 129 | ||
141 | additional_cpus=NUM Allow NUM more CPUs for hotplug | 130 | additional_cpus=NUM Allow NUM more CPUs for hotplug |
142 | (defaults are specified by the BIOS, see Documentation/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec) | 131 | (defaults are specified by the BIOS, see Documentation/x86/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec) |
143 | 132 | ||
144 | NUMA | 133 | NUMA |
145 | 134 | ||
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets index d1a985c5b00a..33bb56655991 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/fake-numa-for-cpusets | |||
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ amount of system memory that are available to a certain class of tasks. | |||
10 | For more information on the features of cpusets, see Documentation/cpusets.txt. | 10 | For more information on the features of cpusets, see Documentation/cpusets.txt. |
11 | There are a number of different configurations you can use for your needs. For | 11 | There are a number of different configurations you can use for your needs. For |
12 | more information on the numa=fake command line option and its various ways of | 12 | more information on the numa=fake command line option and its various ways of |
13 | configuring fake nodes, see Documentation/x86_64/boot-options.txt. | 13 | configuring fake nodes, see Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt. |
14 | 14 | ||
15 | For the purposes of this introduction, we'll assume a very primitive NUMA | 15 | For the purposes of this introduction, we'll assume a very primitive NUMA |
16 | emulation setup of "numa=fake=4*512,". This will split our system memory into | 16 | emulation setup of "numa=fake=4*512,". This will split our system memory into |
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt index efce75097369..29b52b14d0b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt | |||
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Virtual memory map with 4 level page tables: | |||
6 | 0000000000000000 - 00007fffffffffff (=47 bits) user space, different per mm | 6 | 0000000000000000 - 00007fffffffffff (=47 bits) user space, different per mm |
7 | hole caused by [48:63] sign extension | 7 | hole caused by [48:63] sign extension |
8 | ffff800000000000 - ffff80ffffffffff (=40 bits) guard hole | 8 | ffff800000000000 - ffff80ffffffffff (=40 bits) guard hole |
9 | ffff810000000000 - ffffc0ffffffffff (=46 bits) direct mapping of all phys. memory | 9 | ffff880000000000 - ffffc0ffffffffff (=57 TB) direct mapping of all phys. memory |
10 | ffffc10000000000 - ffffc1ffffffffff (=40 bits) hole | 10 | ffffc10000000000 - ffffc1ffffffffff (=40 bits) hole |
11 | ffffc20000000000 - ffffe1ffffffffff (=45 bits) vmalloc/ioremap space | 11 | ffffc20000000000 - ffffe1ffffffffff (=45 bits) vmalloc/ioremap space |
12 | ffffe20000000000 - ffffe2ffffffffff (=40 bits) virtual memory map (1TB) | 12 | ffffe20000000000 - ffffe2ffffffffff (=40 bits) virtual memory map (1TB) |